2008 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity models, a mark is placed at the begin-
confidence. It was produced using the latest with controls and maintenance requirements, as- ning of the applicable sections/items.
techniques and strict quality control. sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
As with other vehicles with features for
This manual was prepared to help you under- off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel
WARNING
stand the operation and maintenance of your drive models correctly may result in loss of
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- control or an accident. Be sure to read
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this MINDERS FOR SAFETY! “Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-
manual before operating your vehicle. ing and driving” section of this manual.
Follow these important driving rules to
A separate Warranty Information Booklet help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
explains details about the warranties cov- for you and your passengers!
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
● NEVER drive under the influence of al- DRIVING
and Maintenance Guide” explains details cohol or drugs.
about maintaining and servicing your ve- This vehicle will handle and maneuver
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits differently from an ordinary passenger
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will and never drive too fast for conditions. car because it has a higher center of
explain how to resolve any concerns you ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving gravity for off-road use. As with other
may have with your vehicle, as well as and avoid using vehicle features or taking vehicles with features of this type, fail-
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon other actions that could distract you.
law. ure to operate this vehicle correctly may
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- result in loss of control or an accident.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
best. When you require any service or have any Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-
children should be seated in the rear road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the seat.
extensive resources available to them. ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving
● ALWAYS provide information about the safety precautions”, in the “Starting and
proper use of vehicle safety features to driving” section of this manual.
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.

੬ REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
09/29/07—debbie ੭

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
This vehicle should not be modified. some information that does not apply to your
Modification could affect its vehicle.
performance, safety or durability, and
All information, specifications and illustrations in
may even violate governmental this manual are those in effect at the time of
regulations. In addition, damage or per- printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
formance problems resulting from modi- specifications or design without notice and with-
fications may not be covered under out obligation.
NISSAN warranties.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways: APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
WARNING
or “Do not let this happen.”
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
risk, the procedures must be followed tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
precisely. vehicle.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
hazard that could cause minor or moder- indicate movement or action.
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

09/29/07—debbie ੭

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 BLUETOOTH௡ is a
WARNING trademark owned by
WARNING Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain Xanavi Informatics
or emit chemicals known to the State of Corporation.
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
Gracenote௡ is a regis-
contain or emit chemicals known to the tered trademark of
State of California to cause cancer and Gracenote, Inc. The
birth defects or other reproductive harm. Gracenote logo and
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE logo type, and the
ADVISORY “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The trademarks of
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Gracenote.
Material – special handling may apply, See
© 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

09/29/07—debbie ੭

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information:
For U.S. customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the Consumer Affairs Department
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s P.O. Box 685003
number:
side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
– Date of purchase For Canadian customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
Nissan Canada Inc.
(1-800-647-7261) – Current odometer reading 5290 Orbitor Drive
For Canadian customers – Your NISSAN dealer’s name Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
1-800-387-0122
– Your comments or questions
OR

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

09/29/07—debbie ੭

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10

09/29/07—debbie ੭

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

09/29/07—debbie ੭

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-12)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
roll-over supplemental air bag
(if so equipped) (P. 1-40)
3. Front seat belts (P. 1-12)
4. Front-seat Active Head Restraints
(P.1-7)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P.1-40)
6. Seats (P. 1-2)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P.1-48)
8. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-53)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (if so equipped)
(P. 1-40)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-22)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

LII0145

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

09/29/07—debbie ੭

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-19)
2. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-24)
3. Windshield (P. 8-20)
4. Power windows (P. 2-47)
5. Door locks, keyfob, keys, Intelligent Key
system (P. 3-4, 3-16, 3-2, 3-6)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-25)
7. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)
8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
9. Tire chains (P. 8-40)
10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)
11. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-27)
12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30)
13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)

WII0048

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

09/29/07—debbie ੭

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Roof rack (P. 2-46)
2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
3. Glass hatch (P. 3-21)
4. Rear window wiper and washer
(P.2-25)
5. Intelligent Key system request button
(P. 3-6)
6. Glass hatch release (P.3-21)
7. Lift gate release switch (P. 3-20)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)
9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-22, P. 9-3)
10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-21)
11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)

WII0124


09/29/07—debbie ੭

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. DVD entertainment system
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-50)
3. Map lights (P. 2-53)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-24)
5. HomeLinkா universal transceiver
6. Glove box (P. 2-39)
7. Front seats (P. 1-2)
8. 2nd row seats (P.1-10)
9. 3rd row seats (P. 1-11)
10. Luggage storage (P. 2-42)

WII0050


09/29/07—debbie ੭

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Ventilators (P. 4-38)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-27)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-40, P. 2-31)
5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)
8. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
9. Navigation system* controls
(if so equipped)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-40)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-34)
13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-32)
14. Hill descent control switch
15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-12)
LIC1223


09/29/07—debbie ੭

16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-33)
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-21)
18. Storage
19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)
20. Climate controls (P. 4-39, 4-46)
21. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)
22. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)
23. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-23)
24. Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped)
25. Pedal position adjustment switch
26. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-27)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).


09/29/07—debbie ੭

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ40DE engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-23)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
8. Drive belt location (P.8-17)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
11. Battery (P. 8-15)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

WDI0633
VQ40DE

09/29/07—debbie ੭

VK56DE engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
6. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
7. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
10. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-23)
11. Battery (P. 8-15)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

WDI0627
VK56DE

09/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Warning Name Page
light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-13 Door open warning 2-15 Shift P lock warning 2-17
or System (ABS) warn- light light (if so equipped)
ing light
Engine oil pressure 2-15 Supplemental air 2-17
warning light bag warning light
Automatic transmis- 2-13
sion check warning 4WD warning light 2-15
light (if so equipped) ( model) Indicator Name Page
light
Automatic transmis- 2-13 Intelligent Key sys- 2-15
sion oil temperature tem warning light (if Automatic transmis- 2-18
warning light so equipped) sion position indica-
tor light
Automatic transmis- 2-13 Low fuel warning 2-16
sion park warning light Cruise main switch 2-18
light ( indicator light
Low tire pressure 2-16
model) warning light Cruise set switch 2-18
Brake warning light 2-14 indicator light
Low windshield 2-17
or washer fluid warning 4WD shift indicator 2-18
light light (
model)
Seat belt warning 2-17
Charge warning 2-14 light and chime Front passenger air 2-18
light
bag status light


09/29/07—debbie ੭

Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page
light light

High beam indicator 2-19 Vehicle dynamic 2-21
light (Blue) control off indicator
light
Hill descent control 2-33
indicator light (if so
equipped)

Malfunction indica- 2-19
tor lamp (MIL)

Overdrive off indica- 2-20
tor light (if so
equipped)

Security indicator 2-20
light

Slip indicator light 2-20

Transfer 4LO posi- 2-20
tion indicator light
( model)

Turn signal/hazard 2-21
indicator lights


09/29/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Front manual seat adjustment Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Front power seat adjustment LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Front-seat Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Child restraint installation using the seat
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

09/29/07—debbie ੭

SEATS

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

WARNING ● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when be upright. Always sit well back in the
the seatback is reclined. This can be seat with both feet on the floor and
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
be against your body. In an accident, tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this
you could be thrown into it and receive section.
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
receive serious internal injuries. to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

09/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131
Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of
seat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever the seat cushion to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

09/29/07—debbie ੭

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park).

WRS0163

FRONT POWER SEAT Forward and backward
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
Operating tips the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor Reclining
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, Move the recline switch backward until the de-
then reactivate the switch. sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a forward again, move the switch forward and
long period of time when the engine is off. move your body forward. The seatback will move
This will discharge the battery. forward.
See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)” The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto- seatback for occupants of different sizes for
matic drive positioner operation. added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

09/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0164 WRS0389 WRS0468

Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Lumbar support (driver’s seat) Outboard seats

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or The lumbar support feature provides lower back
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat support to the driver. Move the lever up or down ADJUSTMENT
cushion. to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Reclining
To recline the outboard seatbacks, pull up on the
lever and lean back.
To recline the center seat, pull up on the strap
located on the lower right-hand portion of the
seatback, and lean back.
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat
back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit
(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this

09/29/07—debbie ੭

section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

WARNING
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
could also slide under the lap belt and WRS0469 LRS0331
receive serious internal injuries. Then ᭺ lift up on the lower corner of the seat
Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row 2
● For the most effective protection when base and tip the outboard seating position of the
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row 2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd row
be upright. Always sit well back in the bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry bench seat lift up on the same latch and fold the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly. or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up
See “Precautions on seat belt usage” 3rd row ᭺ lift up on the latch located on the
1 on the seat base and tip it forward.
later in this section. upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row
bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an
angle over the seat base. This will release the
back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

WRS0470 WRS0134 SPA1025
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT Adjust the head restraint so the center is level FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
with the center of your ears.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, RESTRAINTS
push and hold the lock knob and push the head
restraint down. WARNING
The head restraints on the 2nd and 3rd row seats ● Always adjust the head restraints prop-
are removable. erly as specified in this section. Failure
to do so can reduce the effectiveness of
WARNING the Active Head Restraint.
Head restraints should be adjusted prop- ● Active Head Restraints are designed to
erly as they may provide significant pro- supplement other safety systems. Al-
tection against injury in an accident. Do ways wear seat belts. No system can
not remove them. Check the adjustment prevent all injuries in any accident.
after someone else uses the seat.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

● Do not attach anything to the head re- ● Do not allow people to ride in any area
straint stalks. Doing so could impair of your vehicle that is not equipped with
Active Head Restraint function. seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz- seat belt properly.
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement ● Do not fold down the rear seats when
of the head restraint helps support the occu- occupants are in the rear seat area or
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement any luggage is on the rear seats.
and helping absorb some of the forces that may ● Head restraints should be adjusted
lead to whiplash type injuries. properly as they may provide significant
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions protection against injury in an accident.
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that Always replace and adjust them prop-
whiplash injury occurs most. erly if they have been removed for any
LRS0514 reason.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head ARMREST ● If the head restraints are removed for
restraints return to their original positions. any reason, they should be securely
To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench
stored to prevent them from causing
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and injury to passengers or damage to the
described earlier in this section. fold it down to the resting position. vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
FLEXIBLE SEATING accident.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
WARNING upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
tion. If they are not completely secured,
area or on the rear seats when they are
passengers may be injured in an acci-
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
dent or sudden stop.
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.


10/02/07—debbie ੭

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.

LRS0608 LRS0609
Folding the front passenger’s seatback ᭺
2 Once the seatback is released it will enable
(if so equipped) you to fold the front passenger seatback flat
over the seat cushion.
To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for
extra storage length when transporting long 3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a
items: seating position lift up on the seatback and
push it up to an upright position. Then pull up
᭺
1 Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift on the recline lever and lean the seatback to
up on the recline lever, located on the out-
a proper seating position. Release the lever
side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback
to lock the seatback in position.
forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the
latch located on the upper corner of the
seatback to release the back of the seat.


10/02/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-
back flat forward to carry longer ob-
jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-
cured and not near an air bag. In a
crash, an inflating air bag might force
that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Se-
cure objects away from the area in
which an air bag would inflate. See
“Precautions on supplemental restraint
system” later in this section.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the front passenger’s seat WRS0472 LRS0494
when it is in the fold-down position. Use Folding the 2nd row bench seat ᭺
2 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of
of these areas by passengers could re- the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-
sult in serious injury in an accident or To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,
sudden stop. cargo hauling: pull up on the strap on the edge of the center
᭺
1 Lower the head restraints to the full “down” seat cushion and fold the seatback toward
the front of the vehicle.
position. Pull the strap forward, located in
the center of each seat cushion, and fold
each seat cushion toward the front of the
vehicle.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

LRS0658 WRS0471 LRS0653
᭺
3 There is a carpet panel flap on the back of ᭺
4 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo Folding the 3rd row seats
each seat that can be folded toward the floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded
back of the vehicle flat. To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo
capacity:
5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats
to a seating position reverse the process for 1. Make sure that the head restraints are low-
the outboard seats. ered.
6. To return the center seat to a seating posi- 2. Stow the third row seat belts in the seat belt
tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back of hooks found on the sides of the cargo area.
the seat base while lifting on the seatback. See “Seat belt hook” later in this section.
Then push the seat cushion back into place. 3. Pull up on the latch located in the upper
Make sure to properly raise the seat- corner of each seatback and lower the seat-
back to an upright position and push back forward over the seat base.
the seat cushion down into place.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

SEAT BELTS

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position
use the pull straps to raise each seatback. Pull
back until the seatbacks latch into position.
Make sure to properly raise each seatback
to an upright and secured position.

SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire
strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the
priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
fastened to the proper buckle. tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
effectiveness.
use during a collision be replaced un-
● Do not allow more than one person to less the collision was minor and the
use the same seat belt. belts show no damage and continue to
● Never carry more people in the vehicle operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
than there are seat belts. not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- damage or improper operation is noted.
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- ware should be inspected after any col-
function in the system. Have the system lision. Always follow the restraint
WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
● Always route the shoulder belt over ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti- The child restraints should be replaced
your shoulder and across your chest. vated, it cannot be reused and must be if they are damaged.
Never put the belt behind your back, replaced together with the retractor.
under your arm or across your neck. The See your NISSAN dealer. CHILD SAFETY
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ● Removal and installation of preten- Children need adults to help protect them.
sioner system components should be They need to be properly restrained.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as done by a NISSAN dealer.
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE In addition to the general information in this
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could manual, child safety information is available from
increase the risk of internal injuries in many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
an accident. government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.

09/29/07—debbie ੭

There are three basic types of child restraint for infants and small children. See “Child Re- facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
systems: straints” later in this section. instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
● Rear facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child restraints
mends that small children be placed in child
available for larger children for additional protec-
● Front facing child restraint restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
tion.
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
● Booster seat
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens Safety Standards. You should choose a child
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. and children be restrained in the rear seat. restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less According to accident statistics, children the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear are safer when properly restrained in the and use.
facing child restraints. Front facing child re- rear seat than in the front seat.
straints are available for children who outgrow Larger children
This is especially important because your
rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- Children who are too large for child restraints
old. Booster seats are used to help position a tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
longer use a front facing child restraint. later in this section. properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18
WARNING Infants kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
them properly. The shoulder belt may mends that infants be placed in child restraints commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
come too close to the face or neck. The that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to
lap belt may not fit over their small hip Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- Standards. You should choose a child restraint belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
injury. Always use appropriate child facturer’s instructions for installation and use. properly positioned across the top, middle por-
restraints. tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the
Small Children
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- Children that are over one year old and weigh at positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
tories require the use of approved child restraints least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

09/29/07—debbie ੭

have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian WITH RETRACTOR
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or
WARNING
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat. ● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
WARNING times.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo the seatback is reclined. This can be
areas while the vehicle is moving. The dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
child could be seriously injured or killed in be against your body. In an accident,
an accident or sudden stop. you could be thrown into it and receive
PREGNANT WOMEN could also slide under the lap belt and WRS0174
receive serious internal injuries. Manual front seat shown
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, ● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts
and always position the lap belt as low as pos- the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the be upright. Always sit well back in the
᭺
1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your seat with both feet on the floor and
chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your adjust the seat belt properly.
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
WRS0137 WRS0138
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
᭺
2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor ᭺
3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug straints” later in this section for more information.
and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown.
you hear and feel the latch engage. The ALR mode should be used only for
᭺
4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the child restraint installation. During normal
● The retractor is designed to lock during retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR mode
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
should not be activated. If it is activated it
pulling motion permits the seat belt to and across your chest.
move, and allows you some freedom of may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
The front passenger seat and the rear seating sion. It can also change the operation of
movement in the seat.
positions three-point seat belts have two modes the front passenger air bag. See “Front
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from of operation: passenger air bag and status light” later in
its fully retracted position, firmly pull this section.
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor. ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)


09/29/07—debbie ੭

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
WARNING
check the operation as follows.
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se- ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
cured in the latched position. If they are quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
not completely secured, passengers may strict further belt movement.
be injured in an accident or sudden stop. If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
᭺
1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.

LRS0242 LRS0515
Front and 2nd row outboard seats Seat belt hook
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front When the seat belt is not in use and when folding
and 2nd row outboard seats) down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- the seat belt hooks.
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
To adjust, pull out ᭺ the adjustment button and
1
move the shoulder belt anchor ᭺ to the desired
2
position, so the belt passes over the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-
lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder
belt anchor into position.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

CHILD RESTRAINTS

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
If, because of body size or driving position, it is ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt mild soap solution or any solution recom-
and fasten it, an extender is available which is mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
length and may be used for either the driver or seat belts to retract until they are completely
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dry.
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
WARNING belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
by the same company which made the
● Periodically check to see that the seat
original equipment seat belts, should ARS1098
belt and the metal components, such as
be used with NISSAN seat belts. PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
● Adults and children who can use the and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, RESTRAINTS
standard seat belt should not use an deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
extender. Such unnecessary use could webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
result in serious personal injury in the sembly should be replaced.
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air ● If the child restraint is not anchored
Bag System, never install a rear-facing properly, the risk of a child being in-
child restraint in the front seat. An injured in a collision or a sudden stop
flating front air bag could seriously in- greatly increases.
jure or kill your child. A rear-facing child
● Child restraint anchor points are de-
restraint must only be used in the rear
signed to withstand only those loads
seat.
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
● NISSAN recommends that the child restraints. Under no circumstances are
straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- they to be used for adult seat belts or
cording to accident statistics, children harnesses.
are safer when properly restrained in
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
tioned to fit the child restraint, but as
you must install a front facing child re-
upright as possible.
WRS0256 straint in the front seat, see “Child re-
straint installation using the seat belts” ● After attaching the child restraint, test it
WARNING later in this section. before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the seat
● Infants and small children should al- ● Improper use or improper installation
near the LATCH attachment or by the
ways be placed in an appropriate child of a child restraint can increase the risk
seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and
restraint while riding in the vehicle. or severity of injury for both the child
check to see if the belt holds the re-
Failure to use a child restraint can re- and other occupants of the vehicle and
straint in place. The child restraint
sult in serious injury or death. can lead to serious injury or death in an
should not move more than 1 inch (25
accident.
● Infants and small children should never mm). If the restraint is not secure,
be carried on your lap. It is not possible ● Follow all of the child restraint manu- tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
for even the strongest adult to resist the facturer’s instructions for installation restraint in another seat and test it
forces of a severe accident. The child and use. When purchasing a child re- again. You may need to try a different
could be crushed between the adult and straint, be sure to select one which will child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the fit your child and vehicle. It may not be in all types of vehicles.
same seat belt around both your child possible to properly install some types
and yourself. of child restraints in your vehicle.


09/29/07—debbie ੭

● When your child restraint is not in use, Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
keep it secured with the LATCH system infants and small children of various sizes. When
or a seat belt to prevent it from being selecting any child restraint, keep the following
thrown around in case of a sudden stop points in mind:
or accident. ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
CAUTION Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
Check the seating surface and buckles sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
before placing your child in the child and seat belt system.
restraint.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
WRS0804
restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with LATCH system anchor locations
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid your child. Choose a child restraint that is LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
designed for your child’s height and weight. for CHildren) SYSTEM
or webbing-mounted attachments that can be
Always follow all recommended procedures.
connected to these lower anchors. For details, Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
System (LATCH)” later in this section. territories require that infants and small and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
children be restrained in an approved child child restraints.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint at all times while the vehicle is
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See being operated. The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
“Child restraint installation using the seat belts” child restraints in the 2nd row outboard seating
later in this section. In general, child restraints are positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
also designed to be installed with the lap portion restraint in the center position using the LATCH
of a lap/shoulder seat belt. anchors.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WRS0805 WRS0700 LRS0661
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LATCH lower anchor point locations ● The LATCH system anchors are de- Installing child restraint LATCH anchor
The LATCH system anchors are located at the signed to withstand only those loads attachments
rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A LATCH compatible child restraints include two
straints. Under no circumstance are
label is attached to the seatback to help you rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
they to be used for adult seat belts or
locate the LATCH system anchors. harnesses. be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
WARNING tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
● Attach LATCH system compatible child secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
restraints only at the locations shown. If straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
a child restraint is not secured properly, LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
your child could be seriously injured or structions provided by the child restraint manu-
killed in an accident. facturer.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD If you have any questions when installing a
RESTRAINT top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires tails.
the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to
the anchor point.

WARNING
● Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
LRS0662 harnesses.
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment ● The child restraint top tether strap may
LATCH child restraints generally require the use be damaged by contact with items in
of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child the cargo area. Secure any items in the
restraint” later in this section for installation in- cargo area. Your child could be seri-
structions. ously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and Top Tether Anchor Point Locations
those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child
restraint installation using LATCH” in this section. Anchor points are located in the following loca-
tions:
● 2nd row bench on the floor behind the out-
board seating positions as shown.
● 2nd row bench center seatback as shown.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor ● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
point on the seat directly behind the child your fingers into the lower anchor area
restaint. and feeling to make sure there are no
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the obstructions over the LATCH anchors,
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-
slack. ion material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the LATCH an-
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint chors are obstructed.
installation instructions in this section and the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION restraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:
USING LATCH
1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-
LRS0659
WARNING justable to assist in attaching the child re-
2nd row bench seat straint to the lower anchors.
● Attach LATCH compatible child re-
Installing top tether strap straints only at the locations shown. For 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
the LATCH lower anchor locations, see ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH er’s instructions.
system (rear outboard seat positions only) or the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
seat belt, as applicable. dren System (LATCH)” in this section. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
1. Top tether strap your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
2. Anchor point
● The LATCH anchors are designed to
For the 2nd row bench seat, install the top tether withstand only those loads imposed by
strap as follows: correctly fitted child restraints. Under
1. Position the top tether strap over the top of no circumstance are they to be used for
the head restraint with the head restraint in adult seat belts or harnesses.
the full “down” position.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WRS0799 WRS0800 LRS0671
Front facing web-mounted – step 3 Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3 Front facing – step 5
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- is removed. If the seating position does not have 5. For child restraints that are equipped with
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering webbing mounted attachments, remove any
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- with the proper child restraint fit, try another additional slack from the anchor attach-
erly attached to the lower anchors. seating position or a different child restraint. ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
4. Return the seatback to its normal upright Check to make sure it is not contacting front
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and locked position. seats and preventing it from being properly se-
and seatback while tightening the webbing
cured. If you are unable to properly secure the
The back of the child restraint should be secured of the anchor attachments.
child restraint, move it to another seating position
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or try a different child restraint. 6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct tether strap, route the top tether strap and
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust- secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
ment” in this section. If the head restraint is re- point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure to this section.
install the head restraint when the child restraint

10/01/07—debbie ੭

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4
through 7.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:
1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-
justable to assist in attaching the child re-
straint to the lower anchors.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
WRS0697 er’s instructions. WRS0801
Front facing – step 7 Rear facing web-mounted – step 3
7. Before placing the child in the child restraint, 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
hold the child restraint near the LATCH at- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
tachment and use force to push the child to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
restraint from side to side, and tug it forward erly attached to the lower anchors.
to make sure that it is securely held in place. 4. Return the seatback to its normal upright
It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If and locked position.
it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
again on the anchor attachments to further Check to make sure it is not contacting front
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to seats and preventing it from being properly se-
cured. If you are unable to properly secure the
properly secure the restraint, move the re-
child restraint, move it to another seating position
straint to another seating position and try
or try a different child restraint.
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WRS0802 LRS0673 LRS0674
Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3 Rear facing – step 5 Rear facing – step 6
5. For child restraints that are equipped with 6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
webbing mounted attachments, remove any hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-
additional slack from the anchor attach- tachment and use force to push the child
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
in the center of the child restraint with your to make sure that it is securely held in place.
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
and seatback while tightening the webbing it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
of the anchor attachments. again on the anchor attachments to further
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
properly secure the restraint, move the re-
straint to another seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is ● NISSAN recommends that child re-
properly secured prior to each use. If the straints be installed in the rear seat.
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 However, if you must install a forward
through 6. facing child restraint in the front pas-
senger seat, move the passenger seat
to the rearmost position. Also, be sure
the front passenger air bag status light
is illuminated to indicate the passenger
air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this sec-
tion for details.
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an Automatic Locking
WRS0256 Retractor (ALR) which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
● Failure to use the ALR mode will result
USING THE SEAT BELTS in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
WARNING otherwise be unsecured and cause in-
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air jury to the child in a sudden stop or
Bag System, never install a rear-facing collision. Also, it can change the opera-
child restraint in the front passenger tion of the front passenger air bag. See
seat. Front air bags inflate with great “Front passenger air bag and status
force. A rear-facing child restraint could light” later in this section.
be struck by the front air bag in a crash ● A child restraint with a top tether strap
and could seriously injure or kill your should not be used in the front passen-
child. ger seat.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The instructions in this section apply to child 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
the rear seat or the front passenger seat. er’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust
or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-
ment” in this section.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint
when the child restraint is removed. If the seating
position does not have an adjustable head re-
straint and it is interfering with the proper child
WRS0699 restraint fit, try another seating position or a dif-
Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1 ferent child restraint.
Front-facing When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rd
row, check to make sure that it is not contacting
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child the seat directly in front of it. If you are unable to
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear properly secure the child restraint, move it to
seats or in the front passenger seat: another seating position or try a different child
1. If you must install a child restraint in restraint.
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WRS0680 LRS0667 LRS0668
Front facing – step 3 Front facing – step 4 Front facing – step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the seat belt
path and use force to push the child restraint
from side to side, and tug it forward to make
sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
seating position and try again, or try a differ-
ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
all types of vehicles.
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
WRS0681 WRS0698
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
Front facing – step 6 Front facing – step 7 retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in tether strap, route the top tether strap and in the ALR mode.
the center of the child restraint with your secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion 10. Check to make sure the child restraint is
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
and seatback while pulling up on the seat properly secured prior to each use. If the
this section. Do not install child restraints seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
belt. that require the use of a top tether strap to through 8.
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rd
row, check to make sure that it is not contacting
the seat directly in front of it. If you are unable to
properly secure the child restraint, move it to
another seating position or try a different child
restraint.

WRS0475 WRS0256
Front facing – step 11 Rear-facing – step 1
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front Rear-facing
passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
status light should illuminate. If this restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger seats:
air bag and status lightЉ in this section. 1. Child restraints for infants must be
Move the child restraint to another used in the rear-facing direction and
seating position. Have the system therefore must not be used in the front
checked by a NISSAN dealer. seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re- instructions.
straint mode) is canceled.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WRS0682 LRS0669 LRS0670
Rear facing – step 2 Rear facing – step 3 Rear facing – step 4
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat
belt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-
tor is in the ALR mode.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.

WRS0683 WRS0684
Rear facing – step 5 Rear facing – step 6
5. Remove any additional slack from the child 6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
restraint; press downward and rearward hold the child restraint near the seat belt
firmly in the center of the child restraint to path and use force to push the child restraint
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat- from side to side, and tug it forward to make
back while pulling up on the seat belt. sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

BOOSTER SEATS

● Infants and small children should never ● Do not use towels, books, pillows or
be carried on your lap. It is not possible other items in place of a booster seat.
for even the strongest adult to resist the Items such as these may move during
forces of a severe accident. The child normal driving or a collision and result
could be crushed between the adult and in serious injury or death. Booster seats
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the are designed to be used with a
same seat belt around both your child lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-
and yourself. signed to properly route the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt over
● NISSAN recommends that the booster
the strongest portions of a child’s body
seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
to provide the maximum protection dur-
cording to accident statistics, children
ing a collision.
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If ● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-
ARS1098 you must install a booster seat in the turer’s instructions for installation and
front seat, see “Booster seat installa- use. When purchasing a booster seat,
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER tion” in this section. be sure to select one which will fit your
SEATS ● A booster seat must only be installed in
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of
a seating position that has a
WARNING booster seats in your vehicle.
lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
● Infants and small children should al- three-point type seat belt with a ● If the booster seat and seat belt is not
ways be placed in an appropriate child booster seat can result in a serious in- used properly, the risk of a child being
restraint while riding in the vehicle. jury in sudden stop or collision. injured in a collision or a sudden stop
Failure to use a child restraint or greatly increases.
● Improper use or improper installation
booster seat can result in serious injury of a booster seat can increase the risk ● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-
or death. or severity of injury for both the child tioned to fit the booster seat, but as
and other occupants of the vehicle and upright as possible.
can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt, make
sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
away from the child’s face and neck and
the lap portion of the belt does not
cross the abdomen.
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation”
later in this section.
● When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in LRS0455 LRS0453
case of a sudden stop or accident. Booster seats of various sizes are offered by ● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
several manufacturers. When selecting any supported by the booster seat or vehicle
CAUTION booster seat, keep the following points in mind: seat. The seat back must be at or above the
Remember that a booster seat left in a ● Choose only a booster seat with a label center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
closed vehicle can become very hot. certifying that it complies with Federal Motor low back booster seat ᭺ is chosen, the
1
Check the seating surface and buckles Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian vehicle seat back must be at or above the
before placing your child in the booster Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is
seat. lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be high back booster seat ᭺ should be used.
2
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system. ● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with your
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that booster seats
be installed in the rear seat. However, if
you must install a booster seat in the front
passenger seat, move the passenger’s
seat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor mode when using
a booster seat with the seat belts.
LRS0464 WRS0699
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the 1. If you must install a booster seat in the
territories require that infants and small rear seat or in the front passenger seat: front seat, move the seat to the rear-
children be restrained in an approved child most position.
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
being operated.
place it in a front facing direction. Always
The instructions in this section apply to booster follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
seat installation in the rear seats or the front structions.
passenger seat.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.

LRS0504 LRS0502
Rear center position Rear outboard position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
● Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
LRS0454 WRS0475 ● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
Front passenger position 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front over supplemental air bag
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
● Seat belt with pretensioner
tions for properly fastening a seat belt the ON position. The front passenger air bag
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with status light may or may not illuminate, Supplemental front- impact air bag system:
retractor” earlier in this section. depending on the size of the child and the The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
type of booster seat being used. See “Front cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
passenger air bag and status light” later in the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
this section. collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system (if so equipped): This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side impact collisions. The side air bag is
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system (if so
equipped): This system can help cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in front
and rear outboard seating positions in certain
side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact,
the curtain and rollover air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short
time.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly WRS0031
worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis- WARNING ● The seat belts and the front air bags are
tance away from the steering wheel, instrument most effective when you are sitting well
panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier ● The front air bags ordinarily will not back and upright in the seat. The front
in this section for instructions and precautions on inflate in the event of a side impact, rear air bags inflate with great force. Even
seat belt usage. impact, rollover, or lower severity fron- with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tal collision. Always wear your seat tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
The supplemental air bags operate only belts to help reduce the risk or severity
when the ignition switch is in the ON or forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
of injury in various kinds of accidents. tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
START position.
● The front passenger air bag will not injury or death in a crash. You may also
After turning the ignition key to the ON inflate if the passenger air bag status receive serious or fatal injuries from the
position, the supplemental air bag warning light is lit or if the front passenger seat front air bag if you are up against it
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air when it inflates. Always sit back against
warning light will turn off after about 7 bag and status light” later in this the seatback and as far away as practi-
seconds if the system is operational. section. cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in ARS1133
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043

WARNING WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or ● Children may be severely injured or
extend their hands or face out of the killed when the front air bags, side air
window. Do not attempt to hold them in bags or curtain and rollover air bags
your lap or arms. Some examples of inflate if they are not properly re-
dangerous riding positions are shown strained. Pre-teens and children should
in the illustrations. be properly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256

WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WRS0431 WRS0365 SSS0162
Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags (if so equipped) and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags (if so equipped):
● The side air bags and curtain and roll-
over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in
the event of a frontal impact, rear im-
pact, or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples WRS0363 SSS0159
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially care-
ful with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

rollover supplemental air bag inflators
(if so equipped)
rollover supplemental air bags
(if so equipped)
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Occupant classification system control
unit
7. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor)
8. Satellite sensors
9. Seat belt buckle switches
10. Seat belt with pretensioner
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
(if so equipped)

WRS0474


10/02/07—debbie ੭

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
(front seats) additionally monitors the weight of an occupant of a breathing condition should get fresh air
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based promptly.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- on information from the sensors, only one front air Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the help to cushion the impact force on the face and
passenger seats. This system is designed to crash severity and whether the front occupants chest of the front occupants. They can help save
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, passenger air bag may be automatically turned inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
all of the information, cautions and warn- OFF under some conditions, depending on the or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
ings in this manual still apply and must be weight detected on the passenger seat and how restraint to the lower body.
followed. the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
located in the center of the steering wheel. The illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will senger seated upright as far as practical away
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher this section for further details. One front air bag protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
severity frontal collisions, although they may in- inflating does not indicate improper performance force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
flate if the forces in another type of collision are of the system. risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. against, the front air bag module during inflation.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. If you have any questions about your air bag
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
indication of proper front air bag system opera- dealer. If you are considering modification of your
The front air bags operate only when the
tion. vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the tion.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual front of this Owner’s Manual.
stage inflators. It also monitors information from After turning the ignition key to the ON
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise position, the supplemental air bag warning
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas- may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen- This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a warning light will turn off after about 7
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may seconds if the system is operational.
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Status light as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
The front passenger air bag status light is
to meet the requirements.
located near the climate controls. The light oper-
ates as follows: One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
and will not inflate in a crash.
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, described later. For example, if a child is in the
child or child restraint as outlined in this front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-
section: The illuminates to indicate tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
will not inflate in a crash. child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
WRS0475 tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
Front passenger air bag and status light weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
tion: The light is OFF to indicate that
WARNING tion can vary depending on the front passenger
the front passenger air bag is operational.
seat belt sensors.
The front passenger air bag is designed to Front passenger air bag
automatically turn OFF under some con- The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
ditions. Read this section carefully to The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
learn how it operates. Proper use of the matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- under some conditions as described below in it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
essary for most effective protection. Fail- accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front mode (child restraint mode). Based on the
ure to follow all instructions in this passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a weight on the seat detected by the occupant
manual concerning the use of seats, seat crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your classification sensor and the belt tension de-
belts and child restraints can increase the vehicle are not part of this system.
tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag
risk or severity of injury in an accident. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce System determines whether the front passenger
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag air bag should be automatically turned OFF as
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such required by the regulations.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are If the front passenger seat is not occupied the installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
properly seated and using the seat belt as out- passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
lined in this manual should not cause the passen- crash. However, heavy objects placed on the bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For seat could result in air bag inflation, because of occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the the object’s weight detected by the occupant If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- classification sensor. Other conditions could also minate even though you believe that the child
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out standing on the seat, or if two children are on the properly positioned, the system may be sensing
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode, are seated and restrained properly. system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF. until you have confirmed with your dealer that
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can your air bag is working properly, reposition the
Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
belt properly for the most effective protection by
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
the seat belt and supplemental air bag. The air bag system and passenger air bag status
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children senger seat is unoccupied. light will take a few seconds to register a change
be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
recommends that appropriate child restraints and
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
this is not possible, the occupant classification
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to op-
properly or not using the seat belt properly. operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
erate as described above to turn the front passen-
ger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
required by the regulations. Failing to properly se- the passenger air bag status light may or may not bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
cure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may be illuminated, depending on the size of the child light , located in the meter and gauges area
allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or and the type of child restraint being used. If the air in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
proper use and installation. used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Other supplemental front-impact air bag ● Tampering with the front air bag system ● Work on and around the front air bag
precautions may result in serious personal injury. system should be done by a NISSAN
Tampering includes changes to the dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
WARNING steering wheel and the instrument ment should also be done by a NISSAN
● Do not place any objects on the steer- panel assembly by placing material dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
ing wheel pad or on the instrument over the steering wheel pad and above System (SRS) wiring should not be
panel. Also, do not place any objects the instrument panel or by installing modified or disconnected. Unautho-
between any occupant and the steering additional trim material around the air rized electrical test equipment and
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- bag system. probing devices should not be used on
jects may become dangerous projec- the air bag system.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
tiles and cause injury if the front air passenger seat may result in serious ● A cracked windshield should be re-
bags inflate. personal injury. For example, do not placed immediately by a qualified re-
● Immediately after inflation, several change the front seats by placing mate- pair facility. A cracked windshield could
front air bag system components will be rial on the seat cushion or by installing affect the function of the supplemental
hot. Do not touch them; you may se- additional trim material, such as seat air bag system.
verely burn yourself. covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are
cally designed to assure proper air bag
● No unauthorized changes should be yellow and orange for easy
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
made to any components or wiring of identification.
objects under the front passenger seat
the supplemental air bag system. This is or the seat cushion and seatback. Such When selling your vehicle, we request that you
to prevent accidental inflation of the objects may interfere with the proper inform the buyer about the front air bag system
supplemental air bag or damage to the operation of the occupant classifica- and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
supplemental air bag system. tion sensor (pressure sensor). in this Owner’s Manual.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to ● No unauthorized changes should be
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- made to any components or wiring of
pension system or front end structure. the seat belt system. This may affect the
This could affect proper operation of front air bag system. Tampering with
the front air bag system. the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher side air bag, or curtain and rollover air bag may
severity side collisions, although they may inflate cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags
if the forces in another type of collision are similar and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide
to those of a higher severity side impact. They are restraint to the lower body.
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
collisions.
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to passengers should be seated as far away as
inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near practical from the door finishers and side roof
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air
(for example, during severe off roading) may bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the
cause the air bags to inflate. occupants. Because of this, the force of the side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating
WRS0381 indication of proper side air bag and curtain and can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
Front seat-mounted side-impact rollover air bag operation. too close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
supplemental air bag (if so equipped) When the side air bags and curtain and rollover
quickly after the collision is over.
and roof-mounted curtain side-impact air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-
and rollover supplemental air bag (if so harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should flated for a short time.
equipped) systems be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing The side air bags and curtain and rollover
The side air bags are located in the outside of the air bags operate only when the ignition
condition should get fresh air promptly.
seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll- switch is in the ON or START position.
over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
3 rows. These systems are designed to meet help to cushion the impact force on the chest of After turning the ignition key to the ON
voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags position, the supplemental air bag warning
injury to out-of-position occupants. However, help to cushion the impact force to the head of light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
all of the information, cautions and warn- occupants in the front and rear outboard seating warning light will turn off after about 7
ings in this manual still apply and must be positions in all rows. They can help save lives and seconds if the system is operational.
followed. The side air bags and curtain and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating

10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING ● Tampering with the side air bag system Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
may result in serious personal injury. seats)
For example, do not change the front
back of the front seats. Also, do not seats by placing material near the seat-
place any objects (an umbrella, bag, WARNING
backs or by installing additional trim
etc.) between the front door finisher material, such as seat covers, around ● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
and the front seat. Such objects may the side air bag. ter activation. They must be replaced
become dangerous projectiles and together with the retractor and buckle
cause injury if a side air bag inflates. ● Work around and on the side air bag as a unit.
and curtain and rollover air bag systems
● Right after inflation, several side air bag should be done by a NISSAN dealer. ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
and curtain and rollover air bag system Installation of electrical equipment frontal collision but a pretensioner is
components will be hot. Do not touch should also be done by a NISSAN not activated, be sure to have the pre-
them; you may severely burn yourself. dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* tensioner system checked and, if nec-
● No unauthorized changes should be should not be modified or discon- essary, replaced by your NISSAN
made to any components or wiring of nected. Unauthorized electrical test dealer.
the side air bag and curtain and rollover equipment and probing devices should ● No unauthorized changes should be
air bag systems. This is to prevent dam- not be used on the side air bag or cur- made to any components or wiring of
age to or accidental inflation of the side tain and rollover air bag systems. the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
air bag and curtain and rollover air bag vent damage to or accidental activation
systems. * The SRS wiring harness or connectors are of the pretensioners. Tampering with
yellow or orange for easy identification. the pretensioner system may result in
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- When selling your vehicle, we request that you serious personal injury.
pension system or side panel. This inform the buyer about the side air bag and ● Work around and on the pretensioner
could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the system should be done by a NISSAN
supplemental curtain air bag system. buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
Manual. ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN tem, the supplemental air bag warning
dealer. Correct pretensioner disposal light will not come on, will flash intermit-
procedures are set forth in the appropri- tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or
disposal procedures could cause per- START position. In this case, the pretensioner
sonal injury. system may not function properly. They must be
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction nearest NISSAN dealer.
with the front air bag system. The pretensioner When selling your vehicle, we request that you
system also activates with the curtain and rollover inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
near rollovers. Working with the seat belt retrac- in this Owner’s Manual.
tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions, LRS0397
helping to restrain front seat occupants. 1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt The warning labels are located on the sur-
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way face of the sun visor.
as conventional seat belts. 2. SRS Side air bag warning label (if so
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re- equipped)
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This The warning label is located on the side of
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. the passenger’s side center pillar.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.

10/02/07—debbie ੭

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG When the ignition key is in the ON or START
WARNING LABELS position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
Warning labels about the supplemental front- off. This means the system is operational.
impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain If any of the following conditions occur, the front
side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the and pretensioner systems need servicing:
illustration.
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
LRS0100
not come on at all.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
WARNING LIGHT bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner
The supplemental air bag warning light, systems may not operate properly. They must be
displaying in the instrument panel, moni- checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact nearest NISSAN dealer.
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt
pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits in-
clude the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone
sensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, front air
bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain and
rollover air bag modules, pretensioners and all
related wiring.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light ● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
is on, it could mean that the front air bag, curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag the air bag module will not function
and/or pretensioner systems will not op- again and must be replaced. Addition-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury ally, if any of the front air bags inflate,
to yourself or others, have your vehicle the activated pretensioners must also
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as be replaced. The air bag module and
possible. pretensioners should be replaced by a
NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and
Repair and replacement procedure pretensioners cannot be repaired.
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed and rollover air bag systems and the
to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, pretensioner system should be in-
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is
warning light remains illuminated after inflation any damage to the front end or side
has occurred. Repair and replacement of these portion of the vehicle.
supplemental air bag systems should be done ● If you need to dispose of the supple-
only by a NISSAN dealer. mental air bag, pretensioners or scrap
the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
Correct supplemental air bag and pre-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and tensioner system disposal procedures
rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN
should be pointed out to the person performing Service Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-
the maintenance. The ignition key should always cedures could cause personal injury.
be in the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-29
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-12 Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Storage bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 2nd row under-seat storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Seat pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-53
Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Operating the HomeLinkா universal
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . . 2-56
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

10/01/07—debbie ੭

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Ventilators (P. 4-38)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-27)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-40, P. 2-31)
5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)
8. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
9. Navigation system* controls
(if so equipped)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-40)
11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)
12. Power outlet (P. 2-34)
13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-32)
14. Hill descent control switch
15. Shift selector lever (P. 5-12)
LIC1223

2-2 Instruments and controls

10/01/07—debbie ੭

METERS AND GAUGES

16. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-33)
17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-21)
18. Storage
19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)
20. Climate controls (P. 4-39, 4-46)
21. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)
22. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)
23. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-23)
24. Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped)
25. Pedal position adjustment switch
26. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-27)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).

WIC1040
1. Warning/indicator lights 6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip com-
2. Tachometer puter (if so equipped)
3. Speedometer 7. Engine oil pressure gauge
4. Fuel gauge 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Voltmeter

Instruments and controls 2-3

10/01/07—debbie ੭

WIC0912 LIC0780 LIC0781
1. Speedometer With twin trip odometer With trip computer
2. Odometer Changing the display: For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push-
3. Change button For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer, ing the change button changes the display as
follows:
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER pushing the change button changes the display
as follows: Trip → Trip → Distance to Empty →
Speedometer Average speed → Average fuel consumption →
Trip → Trip → Trip
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Journey time → Trip
Odometer/Twin trip odometer For additional information, refer to “Trip com-
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed puter” later in this section.
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. For vehicles equipped with navigation system,
The odometer records the total distance the ve- refer to “How to use the INFO button” in the
hicle has been driven. “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
The twin trip odometer records the distance of systems” section later in this manual.
individual trips.

10/02/07—debbie ੭

Resetting the trip odometer: that was selected before the warning occurred. Average fuel consumption (Mpg or
The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the l/100km)
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec- vehicle is refueled.
ond resets the trip odometer to zero. The average fuel consumption mode shows the
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte average fuel consumption since the last reset.
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) display will change to (----). Resetting is done by pressing the change button
The display of the trip computer is situated in the for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-
NOTE:
speedometer display. When the ignition is turned play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the
to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip ● If the amount of fuel added while the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
computer and then shows the mode chosen be- ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis- shows (----).
fore the ignition switch was turned OFF. play just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be dis- Journey time
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes played. The journey time mode shows the time since the
of the trip computer can be selected by pushing last reset. The displayed time can be reset by
the trip computer change button. The following ● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may pressing the change button for more than ap-
modes can be selected: proximately 1 second.
momentarily change the display.
Distance to empty (dte—mile or km) Average speed (MPH or km/h) Trip computer reset
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-
The average speed mode shows the average
with an estimation of the distance that can be vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- by pressing the change button for more than tance to empty (dte).
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the approximately 1 second. The display is updated
fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a
The display is updated every 30 seconds. reset, the display shows (----).

The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is
automatically selected and the digits blink in or-
der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the
change button if you wish to return to the mode


10/02/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.

LIC0738 LIC0739
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
into the red zone ᭺.
1
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range ᭺ when the gauge needle points
1
CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC0740 ● For additional information, see “Mal- LIC0741

FUEL GAUGE function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
this section.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-
in the tank. tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The
needle should be in the middle of the gauge when
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
the engine is running.
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the CAUTION
ignition key is turned to OFF. ● This gauge is not designed to indicate
The low fuel warning light comes on when the low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- section.)
ters E (Empty).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

● If the gauge needle does not move with This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
the proper amount of engine oil, have dicates heading direction of vehicle.
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in the or button as described in the
such a condition could cause serious charts below to activate various features of the
damage to the engine. automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Type A
Push and hold Feature:
the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
8 seconds
toggles on/off
WIC1299
Compass zone can be changed to
VOLTMETER 11 seconds
correct false compass readings
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- 13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.
When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-
erator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
range (11 – 15 volts) ᭺ while the engine is
1
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Type B
Push and hold Feature:
the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
8 seconds
correct false compass readings
10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments” section.
WIC0904 LIC0583
Type A Type B
COMPASS DISPLAY You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
Push the or button for about 1 sec- pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
ond when the ignition key is in the ON position to complete circles.
toggle the outside temperature and compass
direction display ᭺ on or off. The display will
1
indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for about
11 seconds or the button for about 8
seconds. The current zone number will ap-
pear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the or the button repeat-
edly to toggle through the zone numbers
until the desired number appears in the dis-
play. Once you have selected a zone num-
ber, the display will show a compass direc-
tion within a few seconds.

WIC0355


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the button for about 13 seconds or
the for about 10 seconds. The “C”
icon in the compass display will illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light
warning light

Automatic transmission check warning light (if Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)
so equipped)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warn- Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control indicator light (if so
ing light equipped)

Automatic transmission park warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction indicator light (MIL)
( model)

or Brake warning light Shift P warning light (if so equipped) Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Door open warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light
( model)

4WD warning light ( model) Cruise set switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Intelligent Key system warning light (if so 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light
equipped)


10/01/07—debbie ੭

CHECKING BULBS If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- Automatic transmission park
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates warning light ( model)
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
and turn the ignition key to the ON position ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec-
without starting the engine. The following lights tion. WARNING
will come on: ● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that
Automatic transmission check the automatic transmission P (Park) po-
, or , , , , warning light (if so equipped) sition will not function and the transfer
The following lights come on briefly and then go When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light case is in neutral.
off: comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes ● When parking, always make sure that
or , , , , , , on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates
transmission system is not functioning properly. and the parking brake is set. Failure to
,
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. engage the transfer position in 2WD,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the
an open circuit in the electrical system. Automatic transmission oil vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting
Have the system repaired promptly. temperature warning light in serious personal injury or property
This light comes on when the automatic transmis- damage.
WARNING LIGHTS
sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comes ● Part time 4WD: Shift the 4WD switch
or Anti-lock Braking on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again
System (ABS) soon as safely possible until the light turns off. to turn off the ATP warning light when
warning light the automatic transmission selector le-
CAUTION ver is in the P position and the ATP
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, warning light is ON. (Before shifting the
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Continued vehicle operation when the A/T
4WD switch into the 4LO position, move
illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the oil temperature warning light is on may
the automatic transmission selector le-
ABS is operational. damage the automatic transmission.
ver into the N position once, shift the
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the selector lever into P again and make
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate sure the ATP warning light is OFF.)
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

10/02/07—debbie ੭

● All mode 4WD: The warning light may Parking brake indicator ● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
come on when the ignition switch is ON When the ignition key is in the ON position, the gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
and the automatic transmission lever is light comes on when the parking brake is applied. level may increase your stopping dis-
shifted to the P position while shifting tance and braking will require greater
the transfer case between 4H and 4LO. Low brake fluid warning light pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD, When the ignition key is in the ON position, the ● If the brake fluid level is below the
AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turn
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
off the ATP warning light when the
comes on while the engine is running with the fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
warning light comes on. (Before shift-
parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and brake system has been checked at a
ing the 4WD switch into the 4LO posi-
perform the following: NISSAN dealer.
tion or out of 4LO in the 4H position,
move the automatic transmission se- 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid Charge warning light
lector lever into the N position.) Shift as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-
the selector lever into the P position tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
and make sure that the 4WD shift indi- If this light comes on while the engine is running,
manual. it may indicate the charging system is not func-
cator light is ON and the ATP warning
light is OFF.) 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
warning system checked by a NISSAN the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
This light indicates that the automatic transmis- dealer. missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans- dealer immediately.
fer control is not secured in any drive position WARNING
while the automatic transmission selector lever is CAUTION
in the P (Park) position, the transmission will ● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ● Do not ground electrical accessories
disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it directly to the battery terminal. Doing
or Brake warning light to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest so will bypass the variable control sys-
service station for repairs. Otherwise, tem and the vehicle battery may not
have your vehicle towed because driv- charge completely. Refer to “Variable
This light functions for both the parking brake and
ing it could be dangerous. voltage control system” in the “Mainte-
the foot brake systems. nance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.


10/02/07—debbie ੭

● Do not continue driving if the generator 4WD warning light ( – in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
belt is loose, broken or missing. model) vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector lever to the
Door open warning light The 4WD warning light comes on when the key N position with the brake pedal de-
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the pressed and shift the 4WD shift
This light comes on when any of the doors are not engine is started. switch to 2WD.
closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, ● If the warning light is still on after the
position. the warning light will either remain illuminated or above operation, have your vehicle
Engine oil pressure warning blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
light and driving” section. possible.

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the CAUTION Intelligent Key system warning
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
light (if so equipped)
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other during operation, have your vehicle The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi-
authorized repair shop. checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as nates green when the ignition switch can be
possible. turned. The Intelligent Key system warning light
The engine oil pressure warning light is not illuminates red when the ignition switch cannot
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD be turned.
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of warning light turns on when you are
The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks
this manual. driving on dry hard surface roads:
red if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the
– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the vehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
CAUTION 4WD shift switch to 2WD. ON position.
Running the engine with the engine oil – in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD ● If the Intelligent Key system warning light
pressure warning light on could cause se- vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift blinks, make sure of the location of the Intel-
rious damage to the engine almost imme- the transmission selector lever to the ligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelli-
diately. Such damage is not covered by N position with the brake pedal de- gent Key should be carried by the driver
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it pressed and shift the 4WD shift
while operating the vehicle.
is safe to do so. switch to 2WD.


10/02/07—debbie ੭

● The Intelligent Key system warning light Low tire pressure warning: TPMS malfunction:
turns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli-
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres- If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
gent Key is brought inside the vehicle.
sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you select tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks the tire pressure information in the display (if so mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
green indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is equipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning mes- placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
almost discharged. sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for each after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
tire will also be displayed. NISSAN dealer.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section. When the low tire pressure warning light illumi- For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres- Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
Low fuel warning light sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure
driving” section.
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel The low tire pressure warning light does not
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- automatically turn off when the tire pressure is WARNING
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom- ● If the light does not illuminate with the
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at ignition switch in the ON position, have
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
reaches E (Empty). TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning as soon as possible.
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
Low tire pressure warning pressure.
light
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”
pressure of all tires except the spare. section.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.

10/02/07—debbie ੭

● If the light illuminates while driving, ● Replacing tires with those not originally is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or specified by NISSAN could affect the for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, proper operation of the TPMS. is securely fastened.
pull off the road to a safe location and The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. CAUTION the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
Driving with under-inflated tires may when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
permanently damage the tires and in- ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to 7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
check the tire pressure regularly. position, the system does not activate the warn-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re- ing light for the front passenger.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
sult in serious personal injury. Check of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust TPMS may not operate correctly. belts and supplemental restraint system” section
the tire pressure to the recommended for precautions on seat belt usage.
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire ● Be sure to install the specified size of
and Loading Information label to turn tires to the 4 wheels correctly. Shift P warning light (if so
the low tire pressure warning light OFF. equipped)
If the light still comes on while driving
Low windshield washer fluid
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire warning light This light blinks red and the key reminder chime
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re- sounds if the shift selector lever is in any position
This light comes on when the windshield washer
place it with a spare tire as soon as other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid
possible. the OFF position. Return the shift selector lever
as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel to P (Park) with the ignition switch in the OFF
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
is replaced, tire pressure will not be manual. position and the light will turn off. Place the
indicated, the TPMS will not function ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
and the low tire pressure warning light Seat belt warning light and chime will turn off.
will flash for approximately 1 minute. chime Supplemental air bag warning
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
The light and chime remind you to fasten your light
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
possible for tire replacement and/or When the ignition key is in the ON or START
ignition key is turned to the ON or START position
system resetting.
and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt position, the supplemental air bag warning light

10/02/07—debbie ੭

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
WARNING Cruise set switch indicator
off. This means the system is operational. light
If the supplemental air bag warning light
If any of the following conditions occur, the front is on, it could mean that the front air bag, The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
air bag, side air bag (if so equipped), curtain and side air bag (if so equipped), curtain and controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
roll-over air bag (if so equipped) and preten- roll-over air bag systems (if so equipped) blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle and/or pretensioner systems will not op- the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: erate in an accident. To help avoid injury erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
to yourself or others, have your vehicle dealer.
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
possible. 4WD shift indicator light
● The supplemental air bag warning light ( model)
flashes intermittently. INDICATOR LIGHTS
The light should turn off within 1 second after
● The supplemental air bag warning light does Automatic transmission turning the ignition switch to ON.
not come on at all. position indicator light While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental cator light will illuminate the position selected by
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- the 4WD shift switch.
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- tion, this indicator light shows the automatic
tensioners may not function properly. For addi- transmission selector lever position. See “Driving The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys- the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section while shifting from one drive mode to the
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and of this manual. other.
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual. Cruise main switch indicator Front passenger air bag
light status light
The light comes on when the cruise control main The front passenger air bag status light ( )
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
is being used.
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

For front passenger air bag status light operation, For additional information, see “Hill descent con- Operation
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in trol switch” later in this section and “Hill descent
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- one of two ways:
restraint system” section of this manual. tion of this manual.
● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
High beam indicator light Malfunction Indicator Light emission control system malfunction has
(blue) (MIL) been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
This blue light comes on when the headlight high If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks or install the cap and continue to drive the
beams are on and goes out when the low beams while the engine is running, it may indicate a vehicle. The light should turn off after
are selected. potential emission control malfunction. a few driving trips. If the light does not
The high beam indicator light also comes on The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
when the passing signal is activated. on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
Hill descent control system on the dealer.
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
indicator light (if so equipped) tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons ● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. engine misfire has been detected which may
When the ignition switch is turned ON, this light damage the emission control system. To re-
comes on briefly and then turns off. After a few driving trips, the light should duce or avoid emission control system dam-
The light comes on when the hill descent control turn off if no other potential emission control age:
system is activated. system malfunction exists.
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
If the hill descent control switch is on and the If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 (72 km/h).
indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged. seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
If the indicator light does not come on or blink vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- – avoid steep uphill grades.
when the hill descent switch is on, the system tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
may not be functioning properly. Have the system ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the being hauled or towed.
checked by a NISSAN dealer. “Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking For additional information, see “Security sys- Transfer 4LO position
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected tems” later in this section. indicator light ( model)
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer. Slip indicator light The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to ON.
CAUTION This indicator light will blink when the traction This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is
control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery set in the 4LO position with the ignition key in the
Continued vehicle operation without hav- road conditions may exist if the slip indicator
ing the emission control system checked ON position.
blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving
and repaired as necessary could lead to The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the
accordingly.
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, switch while driving.
and possible damage to the emission con- The slip indicator light also comes on when you
trol system. turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch
Overdrive off indicator light operational. If the light does not come on or does
to 4LO.
(A/T model) (if so equipped) not go off, have the traction control system The indicator light may blink while shifting
This light comes on when the overdrive function checked by a NISSAN dealer. from one drive mode to the other.
is OFF. If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac- All mode 4WD (if so equipped)
The automatic transmission overdrive function is tion control system is disabled and the slip indi- If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position
controlled by the overdrive switch. cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when and the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowly
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. forward and the light will turn on.
For additional information, see “Driving the ve- To reset the system, you must perform the reset
hicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the
manual. vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,
Security indicator light tion of this manual.
then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to
If the light does not go off after performing the 4LO or 4H.
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in reset procedure, have the traction control system
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function checked by a NISSAN dealer.
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch Vehicle Dynamic Control off If the light does not go off after performing the
between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle indicator light reset procedure, have the traction control system
and shift the transmission selector lever to the N checked by a NISSAN dealer.
position with the brake pedal depressed. This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
Part time 4WD (if so equipped) transfer case is in the 4LO position ( the system working when starting the vehicle or
The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys- accelerating, but this is normal.
remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the tem is not functioning properly. This indicates the
transmission into gear. If the transmission selec- Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not operating. AUDIBLE REMINDERS
tor lever is shifted from the N position to any other Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch Brake pad wear warning
gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the again or restart the engine and the system will
vehicle may move unexpectedly. The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever tion of this manual. vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
to the N position with the brake pedal depressed, The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
4LO or 4H. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the Key reminder chime
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch system is operational. If the light stays on or
between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle comes on along with the SLIP indicator light A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while
and shift the transmission selector lever to the N while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key
position with the brake pedal depressed. Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Turn signal/hazard indicator If the battery is removed or discharged, the Ve- Light reminder chime
hicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and the
lights VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec- With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a
onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal the headlights or parking lights are on.
switch is activated. position. To reset the system, you must perform
the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving the vehicle.
on. ing” section of this manual.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

SECURITY SYSTEMS

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, ● any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be els).
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
● the keyfob or Intelligent Key.
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and ● Push the button. All doors lock.
tracking systems, are available at auto supply The hazard lights flash twice and the horn
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer beeps once to indicate all doors are
may also offer such equipment. Check with your locked.
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
● When the button is pushed with
for discounts for various theft protection features.
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
How to arm the vehicle security twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
system minder that the doors are already locked.
WIC0841
Your vehicle has two types of security systems: 1. Close all windows and the glass hatch. (The The horn may or may not beep. Refer to
system can be armed even if the win- “Silencing the horn beep feature” in the Pre-
● Vehicle security system driving checks and adjustments” section or
dows are open. However, the glass
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System hatch must be closed.) “Comfort & Convenience settings” in the
“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM 2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- recognition systems” section.
The vehicle security system provides visual and tion and remove the key.
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a can be locked with:
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. ● the power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked and then closed).
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or ● the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- gent Key models).
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

10/01/07—debbie ੭

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes Vehicle security system activation NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
on. The light stays on for about 30 SYSTEM
seconds. The vehicle security system is now The vehicle security system will give the following
pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve- alarm: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
hicle security system automatically shifts ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds allow the engine to start without the use of a
into the armed phase. The light begins intermittently. registered key.
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
● The alarm automatically turns off after ap- If the engine fails to start using a registered key
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm (for example, when interference is caused by
door is unlocked by the key, a request
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with another registered key, an automated toll road
switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking device or automatic payment device on the key
ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the
the driver’s door with the key, a request ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
system will not arm.
switch or by pressing the button on cedures:
● If the key is turned slowly when locking the keyfob or Intelligent Key. 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
the driver’s door, the system may not
The alarm is activated by: for approximately 5 seconds.
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the ● opening a door without using the key or 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
unlock position to remove the key, the keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using position, and wait approximately 10 sec-
system may be disarmed when the key the inside lock knob or the power door lock onds.
is removed. If the indicator light fails to switch). 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door
once and lock it again. ● opening the glass hatch without unlocking 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
the lift gate. (which may have caused the interference)
● Even when the driver and/or passen-
separate from the registered key.
gers are in the vehicle, the system will How to stop an activated alarm
arm with all doors closed and locked If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
with the ignition key in the OFF posi- The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
tion. door with the key, pressing the button on
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all
devices.
doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key
models).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
LIC0474 WIC0843
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER- The security indicator light blinks whenever the The windshield wiper and washer operates when
ATE THE EQUIPMENT. ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC the ignition switch is in the ON position.
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the ᭺
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
ignition key is in the ON position. can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
᭺ (Slower) or ᭺ (Faster). Also, the inter-
A B
mittent operation speed varies in accor-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
tent operation speed will be faster.)
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH

NOTE:
CAUTION
You can turn on or turn off the driving ● Do not operate the washer continu-
speed dependent intermittent wiper func- ously for more than 30 seconds.
tion for vehicles with navigation system.
Refer to “Comfort & Convenience settings” ● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voir tank is empty.
voice recognition systems” section later in ● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
this manual. tank with washer fluid concentrates at
᭺
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
᭺
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera- permanently stain the grille if spilled
tion while filling the window washer reser-
Push the lever up ᭺ to have one sweep opera-
4 voir tank.
tion (MIST) of the wiper. ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with WIC0844
Pull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the
5 water to the manufacturer’s recom- The rear window wiper and washer operate when
washer. The wiper will also operate several times. mended levels before pouring the fluid the ignition switch is in the ON position.
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
WARNING
tank to mix the washer fluid concen- to operate the wiper.
In freezing temperatures the washer solu- trate and water.
tion may freeze on the windshield and ᭺
1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation
obscure your vision which may lead to an (not adjustable)
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
᭺
2 ON – continuous low speed operation
Push the switch forward ᭺ to operate the
3
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the window and ob-
scure your vision. Warm the rear window
with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.

CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
LIC0782 LIC1173
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at Type A Type B
full strength. Some methyl alcohol To defrost the rear window glass and outside
based washer fluid concentrates may mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
permanently stain the grille if spilled push the rear window defroster switch on. The
while filling the window washer reser- rear window defroster indicator light comes on.
voir tank. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with The rear window defroster automatically turns off
water to the manufacturer’s recom- after approximately 15 minutes.
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank. CAUTION
Do not use the window washer reservoir
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
trate and water.
age the rear window defroster.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC0560 LIC0687 LIC0688
Type A Type B Type C
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH CAUTION
Lighting Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
᭺
1 When turning the switch to the posi- battery.
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
᭺
2 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
᭺
3 To select the high beam, push the lever
forward. Push the lever back to select the
low beam.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion ᭺.
1

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is
opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute
timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
LIC0561 LIC0835
the OFF, , or position.
Autolight system (if so equipped) Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor ᭺ located on the top
1
The autolight system allows the headlights to be side of the instrument panel. The autolight
set so they turn on and off automatically. The sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-
autolight system can: ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
license plate and instrument panel lights au- If this occurs while parked with the engine
tomatically when it is dark. off and the key in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

After the headlights automatically turn off with the
WARNING
headlight switch in the or position,
the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if When the daytime running light system is
the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
and then turned to the or position. on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
CAUTION an accident injuring yourself and others.

Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
LIC0562
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
Headlight beam select (Canada only)
᭺
1 To select the high beam function, push the The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
lever forward. The high beam lights come on duced intensity when the engine is started with
and the light illuminates. the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
᭺
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
OFF position or in the position. Turn the
᭺
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight switch to the position for full
headlight high beams on and off. illumination when driving at night.
Battery saver system If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
headlight switch is in the or posi- the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes. ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is turned off.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

WIC0917 LIC0563 LIC0393
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
CONTROL Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
The instrument brightness control operates when to the position, then turn the fog light
the headlight control switch is in ᭺
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the switch to the position.
turning direction. When the turn is com-
the , or AUTO position (with auto- To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
lights activated). in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-
Turn the control ᭺ to adjust the brightness of
A Lane change signal lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the position.
instrument panel lights when driving at night. ᭺
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER HORN
SWITCH

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

LIC0394 LIC0604
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi- To sound the horn, push the area near the horn
tions. All turn signal lights flash. icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
move the vehicle well off the road. could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers pering with the supplemental front air bag
while moving on the highway unless system may result in serious personal
unusual circumstances force you to injury.
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)
equipped)

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:
The heated steering wheel switch is
equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the
switch has been activated for 30 minutes,
the system will automatically turn off. If the
surface temperature of the steering wheel
is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is
turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC0421 LIC1041
The heated steering wheel system is designed to
operate only when the surface temperature of the The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if
steering wheel is below approximately 68°F so equipped).
(20°C). 1. Start the engine.
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The desired, depending on the temperature. The
indicator light will come on. indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the automatically turning the heater on and off.
steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, auto-
matically turning the heater on and off. The indi- 3. When the seat is warmed or before you
cator light will remain on as long as the switch is leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
on. off.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
OFF SWITCH so equipped)

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat WIC0534 LIC0743
should be removed immediately with a The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
dry cloth. WARNING
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
● When cleaning the seat, never use ing conditions. ● Never rely solely on the hill descent
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC control system to control vehicle speed
lar materials. system reduces the engine output to reduce when driving on steep downhill grades.
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced Always drive carefully when using the
● If any abnormalities are found or the hill descent control system and decel-
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
heated seat does not operate, turn the erate the vehicle speed by depressing
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
switch off and have the system checked the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe-
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
by your NISSAN dealer. cially careful when driving on frozen,
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF muddy or extremely steep downhill
● The battery could run down if the seat switch. The indicator will come on.
heater is operated while the engine is roads. Failure to control vehicle speed
not running. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the may result in a loss of control of the
engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle Dy- vehicle and possible serious injury or
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and death.
driving” section.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

POWER OUTLET

● The hill descent control may not control ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load and the vehicle speed must be under 21
or road conditions. Always be prepared mph (35 km/h), and
to depress the brake pedal to control ● the hill descent control system switch must
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re- be ON.
sult in a collision or serious personal
injury. The hill descent control indicator light will come
on when the system is activated. Also, the
stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent
CAUTION control system applies the brakes to control ve-
When the hill descent control system op- hicle speed.
erates continuously for a long time, the
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
temperature of the brake pads may in-
while the hill descent control system is on, the
crease and the hill descent control system
system will stop operating temporarily. As soon
may be temporarily disabled (the indicator WIC1268
as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the
light will blink). If the indicator light does Front row
hill descent control system begins to function
not come on continuously after blinking,
again if the hill descent control operating condi- The power outlets are for powering electrical
stop using the system.
tions are fulfilled. accessories such as cellular telephones.
The hill descent control system is designed to The hill descent control indicator light blinks if the The bottom power outlet located on instrument
reduce driver workload when going down steep switch is on and all conditions for system activa- panel and the power outlet located in the cargo
hills. The hill descent control system helps to tion are not met or if the system becomes disen- area are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.
control vehicle speed so the driver can concen- gaged for any reason.
trate on steering the vehicle. The top power outlet (if so equipped) located on
To turn off the hill descent control system, push the instrument panel and the power outlet lo-
To activate the hill descent control system: the switch to the OFF position. cated inside the center console are powered only
● the automatic transmission selector lever For additional information, see “Hill descent con- when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON posi-
must be in forward or reverse gear, trol system on indicator light” earlier in this section.
● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position tion and “Hill descent control system” in the
Open the cap to use a power outlet.
and the vehicle speed must be under 15 “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
mph (25 km/h) or

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.

LIC0761 LIC0762
Center console Luggage area
CAUTION ● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
● The outlet and plug may be hot during battery.
or immediately after use.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
● Only certain power outlets are designed conditioner, headlights or rear window
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do defroster is on.
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN ● Before inserting or disconnecting a
dealer for additional information. plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

STORAGE

WIC1277 WIC1269 WIC0830
Top center tray (if so equipped) Bottom center tray Right-hand side 3rd row tray
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
den stop.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WIC1270 LIC0776
Front row bin Left-hand side 3rd row bin (if so equipped)
STORAGE BINS


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LIC0875 LIC0766
2ND ROW UNDER-SEAT STORAGE CONSOLE BOX
BIN Pull up on the lever ᭺ to open the console box lid
1
To access the under-seat storage bins: ᭺.
2

᭺
1 Tip up the 2nd row bench seat. Refer to “Tip
up for easy entry to the 3rd row” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section earlier in this
manual.
᭺
2 Fold up the bottom cushion of the center
seat.
᭺
3 Push the latch to release the storage bin
cover.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC0768 WIC0673
GLOVE BOX SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the top portion of the glove box, push the To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
latch ᭺ up and raise the lid.
A
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull
the handle ᭺ down and lower the lid.
B WARNING
Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or driving to prevent an accident.
unlock the glove box.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LIC0772 LIC0575 WIC1271

MAP POCKETS SEAT POCKETS Front

A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s
CUP HOLDERS
seat. The front cup holders have adapters that can be
removed to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

WIC0771 LIC0773
2nd row (rear of front console) 3rd row — Type A
To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LIC0774 LIC0784 LIC0777
3rd row — Type B Bottle holder CARGO AREA STORAGE
CAUTION To access the floor storage area, push down ᭺ 1
● Do not use bottle holder for any other to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle ᭺
2
objects that could be thrown about in to lift the luggage board.
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident. LUGGAGE HOOKS
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo
containers. with ropes or other types of straps.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these WTI0125 LTI0126
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Side finisher Floor hooks
● Do not allow people to ride in any area When hooking on ropes, do not apply a load of Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)
of your vehicle that is not equipped with more than 55 lb (245 N) to a single ᭺ hook or 44
A to a single hook.
seats and seat belts. lb (196 N) to a single ᭺ hook.
B

● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in a collision if
the top strap is damaged.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LIC0778 LIC0793
Large net (if so equipped) Right-hand luggage side
CARGO NETS The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo net (if so equipped)
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
WARNING
WARNING motion.
● The cargo restrained in the luggage
● Properly secure all cargo to help pre- To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the side nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg)
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not retainers. for each net or the net may not stay
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from secured.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured the cargo net retainers.
cargo could cause personal injury. ● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-
gage side nets. Such objects may be-
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the come dangerous projectiles and cause
retainers. The cargo restrained in the injury when the vehicle is moving or if
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the vehicle is involved in a collision.
the net may not stay secured.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LIC0794 LIC0795
Left-hand luggage side net (if so equipped) Lift gate net
To install a luggage side net, attach the net to the The lift gate net is not removable.
retainers. To remove, detach the net from the
retainers. WARNING
● The cargo restrained in the lift gate net
must not exceed 2 lb (1 kg) or the net
may not stay secured.
● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-
gage side nets. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and cause
injury when the vehicle is moving or if
the vehicle is involved in a collision.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
roof rack.
● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or abnor-
mal handling maneuvers.
● Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load
weight capacity.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.

WIC0914 CAUTION
ROOF RACK Use care when placing or removing items
from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-
ably lift the items onto the roof rack from
the ground, use a ladder or stool.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WINDOWS

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof 7. Always check the tightness of the Torxா POWER WINDOWS
rack. Do not load more than 200 pounds (91 kg). head fasteners.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the To remove: WARNING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and 1. Loosen the 2 Torxா head fasteners ᭺ on
A ● Make sure that all passengers have
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the both ends of the crossbar. their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s door it is in motion and before closing the
2. Remove the crossbar from the roof rack. windows. Use the window lock switch
pillar). For more information regarding GVWR
and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information” to prevent unexpected use of the power
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- windows.
tion later in this manual. ● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
The front and rear cross bars (if so equipped) can
tivate switches or controls and become
be adjusted or removed.
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
To adjust: dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
1. Loosen the 2 Torxா head fasteners ᭺ on
A
both ends of the crossbar. The power windows operate when the ignition
2. Remove the plugs at the desired position switch is in the ON position, or for about 45
(᭺).
C seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door
3. Slide the crossbar ᭺ to the desired position
B is opened during this period of about 45 sec-
(᭺) so that the holes in the crossbar line up
C onds, power to the windows is canceled.
with the holes in the sidebar.
4. Tighten the 2 Torxா head fasteners on both
ends of the crossbar.
5. Reinstall the plugs at the previous position
᭺.
A

6. Position your luggage on the crossbars and
secure the luggage with rope.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.

WIC1124 WIC1265
1. Window lock button Front passenger’s power window
2. Power door lock switch switch
3. Front passenger’s side automatic
The passenger’s window switch operates only
switch
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
4. Right rear passenger window switch the window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺.
1
5. Left rear passenger window switch To close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.2
6. Driver’s side automatic switch


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation, when
the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
OFF position.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation as it
is closing, the window will be immediately low-
ered.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
LIC0787 LIC0410
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
Rear power window switch Automatic operation curs.
The rear power window switches open or close To fully open a window equipped with automatic
only the corresponding windows. To open the WARNING
operation, press the window switch down to the
window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺. To
1 second detent and release it; it need not be held. There are some small distances immedi-
close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.
2
The window automatically opens all the way. To ately before the closed position which
stop the window, lift the switch up while the cannot be detected. Make sure that all
Locking passengers’ windows passengers have their hands, etc., inside
window is opening.
When the window lock button is depressed, only the vehicle before closing the window.
the driver’s side window can be opened or To fully close a window equipped with automatic
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
function. and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically closes all the way. To stop the win-
dow, press the switch down while the window is
closing.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
CAUTION
toward UP/CLOSE ᭺. 2
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the from the moonroof before opening.
switch in any direction while the moonroof is
sliding to stop it in the desired position. ● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Tilting the moonroof
Auto reverse function (when closing or
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch to- tilting down the moonroof)
ward UP/CLOSE ᭺. Release the switch, then
2
push the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the The auto reverse function can be activated when
moonroof up. the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition key is in the ON
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch to- position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition
WIC0882 ward DOWN/OPEN ᭺. 1 key is turned to the OFF position.
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF WARNING
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition ● In an accident you could be thrown from be activated if an impact or load similar to
switch is in the ON position. The automatic the vehicle through an open moonroof. something being caught in the moonroof
moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, Always use seat belts and child occurs.
even if the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or restraints.
OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front ● Do not allow anyone to stand up or WARNING
passenger’s door is opened during this period of extend any portion of their body out of There are some small distances immedi-
about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is the moonroof opening while the vehicle ately before the closed position which
canceled. is in motion or while the moonroof is cannot be detected. Make sure that all
closing. passengers have their hands, etc., inside
Sliding the moonroof
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-
ward DOWN/OPEN ᭺. 1


10/01/07—debbie ੭

INTERIOR LIGHTS

When closing:
CAUTION
If the control unit detects something caught in the ● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof from the moonroof before opening.
will immediately open backward.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
When tilting down: moonroof or surrounding area.
If the control unit detects something caught in the Sunshade
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up. Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep If the moonroof does not close
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close moonroof. LIC0789
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
Type A
moonroof.
The interior lights have a three-position switch
WARNING and operate regardless of ignition switch posi-
● In an accident you could be thrown from tion.
the vehicle through an open moonroof. When the switch is in the ON position ᭺, the 1
Always use seat belts and child interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-
restraints. tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON
extend any portion of their body out of position.
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is
activated when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is turned ON.
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-
utes while doors are open to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.
When the switch is in the OFF position ᭺, the 3
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.

LIC0792 CAUTION LIC0790
Type B Do not use for extended periods of time To turn the personal lights on, press the switches.
When the switch is in the O position ᭺, the 2 with the engine stopped. This could result To turn them off, press the switches again.
interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds in a discharged battery.
when: CAUTION
● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key Do not use for extended periods of time
or the power door lock switch while all doors with the engine stopped. This could result
are closed and the ignition switch is in the in a discharged battery.
OFF position.
● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
● The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems.
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
LIC0791 LIC0590 nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three- ming.
turn them off, press the switches again. position switch. To operate, push the switch to Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
the desired position. is programmed, retain the original trans-
CAUTION ON: The light is illuminated. mitter for future programming procedures
Do not use for extended periods of time (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
Normal (center) position: The light illuminates
with the engine stopped. This could result sale of the vehicle, the programmed
when any door is opened or unlocked by the
in a discharged battery. HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons
keyfob. The light turns off after 30 seconds when
all doors are closed. should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information refer to “Program-
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.
door position or lock status.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in- WIC0986 WIC0987
creases the risk of serious injury or
death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to
● During the programming procedure 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer program and the hand-held transmitter but-
your garage door or security gate will HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)
ton.
open and close (if the transmitter is until the indicator light ᭺ blinks (after 20
1
within range). Make sure that people or seconds). Release both buttons. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
objects are clear of the garage door, 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter been completed.
gate, etc. that you are programming. 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned HomeLinkா surface.
off while programming the HomeLinkா
Universal Transceiver.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator NOTE: PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Once you have pressed and released the
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing program button on the garage door open-
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
Use the help of a second person for conve- HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the
ing light indicates successful programming. nience to assist when performing this step.
To activate the garage door or other pro- HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-
grammed device, press and hold the pro-
ing the garage door opener program button, press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing
quickly and firmly press and release the 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
when the device begins to activate. (indicating successful programming).
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks Press and release the HomeLinkா button up
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, to 3 times to complete the training. NOTE:
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code” 8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro- When programming a garage door opener,
garage door opener signal. You will need to grammed. (To program the remaining etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
HomeLinkா to complete the programming gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.) sible damage to the garage door opener
which may require a ladder and another per- components.
son for convenience. NOTE:
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
gram button located on the garage door “clear” all previously programmed
opener’s motor to activate the “training HomeLinkா buttons. The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-
mode”. This button is usually located near grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-
If you have any questions or are having difficulty rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-
the antenna wire that hangs down from the programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to
motor. If the wire originates from under a propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to or call 1-800-355-3515. illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
access the program button.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has
DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand- Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, that was just programmed. This procedure will
held transmitter information: to clear all programming, press and hold the two not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா
outside buttons and release when the indicator buttons.
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
with new batteries.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
● position the hand-held transmitter with its REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
battery area facing away from the HOMELINKா BUTTON If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
HomeLinkா surface. codes of any non-rolling code device that has
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
● press and hold both the HomeLinkா and button, complete the following. Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
ruption. ton. Do not release the button until step 4 information.
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 has been completed.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the 2. When the indicator light begins to flash need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in slowly (after 20 seconds), position the sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
that position for up to 15 seconds. If hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that information.
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
time, try holding the transmitter in another FCC Notice:
position – keeping the indicator light in view 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
at all times. button. This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
If you continue to have programming difficulties, 4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first tion is subject to the following two condi-
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator tions:
Department. The phone numbers are located in light begins to flash rapidly, release both
the Foreword of this manual. buttons. (1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

This transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Intelligent keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Opening the fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

10/01/07—debbie ੭

KEYS

A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.

WPD0128 LPD0350
1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- 1. Two Intelligent Keys
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand 2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
symbol on one side Keys)
2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip 3. Key number plate
3. Key number plate INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)
4. Transponder chip
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
hicle Immobilizer System components.
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
of your key number plate.
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

10/01/07—debbie ੭

the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle
CAUTION
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the
registration process requires erasing all memory Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key components when register- in the Intelligent Key slot.
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys
that you have to the NISSAN dealer. Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
CAUTION them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which chanical key with you to protect your belongings.
contains electrical components, to To prevent the glove box or console box from
come into contact with water or salt being opened during valet hand-off, follow the
water. This could affect the system procedure below.
function.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key. SPA1951 gent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply Mechanical key 2. Lock the glove box or console box with the
against another object. mechanical key.
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an which can be used in case of a discharged bat- 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
extended period in an area where tem- tery. keep the mechanical key with you.
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. section.
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
equipment that produces a magnetic the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to SYSTEM KEYS
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and the lock position.
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
personal computers. The mechanical key can be used for operation in or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
the same way as an ordinary key. Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

10/01/07—debbie ੭

DOORS

The master key can be used for all the locks.
WARNING
The valet key cannot be used for the glove box ● Always have the doors locked while
lock. driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
To protect belongings when you leave a key with this provides greater safety in the event
someone, give them the valet key only. of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
Never leave these keys in the vehicle. vehicle. This also helps keep children
Additional or replacement keys: and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
If you still have a key, the key number is not intruders.
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
● Before opening any door, always look
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used ● Do not leave children unattended inside LPD0240
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- Driver’s side
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to tivate switches or controls. Unattended
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be- children could become involved in seri- LOCKING WITH KEY
cause the registration process will erase the ous accidents. The power door lock system allows you to lock or
memory of all key codes previously registered unlock all doors at the same time.
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components Turning the key toward the front ᭺ of the vehicle
1
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN locks all doors.
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺ of the
2
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
of registration will no longer be able to start your returning the key to neutral ᭺ (where the key can
3
vehicle. only be removed and inserted) and turning it
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
contains an electrical transponder, to come into all doors ᭺.
4
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition and any door
open, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-
matically. This helps to prevent the keys from
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

LPD0298 WPD0381
Inside lock Door lock switch
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
KNOB LOCK SWITCH
To lock the door without the key, move the inside To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock knob to the lock position ᭺, then close the
1 lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
door. the lock position ᭺. When locking the door this
1
To unlock the door without the key, move the way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
inside lock knob to the unlock position ᭺.
2 vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position ᭺.
2


10/01/07—debbie ੭

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)

● When operating near a location where
WARNING
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
Radio waves could adversely affect elec- a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
tric medical equipment. Those who use a station.
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the ● When in possession of wireless equipment,
possible influences before use. such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
door locks using the remote controller function or
covered by metallic materials.
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The ● When any type of radio wave remote control
operating environment and/or conditions may af- is used nearby.
fect the Intelligent Key system operation. ● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
LPD0299 Be sure to read the following before using the electric appliance such as a personal com-
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Intelligent Key system. puter.

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors ● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
CAUTION meter.
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle. ● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with In such cases, correct the operating conditions
you when operating the vehicle. before using the Intelligent Key function or use
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors. ● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the the mechanical key.
vehicle when you leave the vehicle. Although the life of the battery varies depending
When the lever is in the lock position, the
door can be opened only from the outside. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
charged, replace it with a new one.
ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink
following operating conditions. green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
CAUTION
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig- ● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat- contains electrical components, to unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
tery life may become shorter. come into contact with water or salt the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
water. This could affect the system procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
For information regarding replacement of a bat- function.
tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section. ● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, ● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition against another object.
switch in the LOCK position is impossible when ● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un- Key.
locking the steering wheel is impossible even if
the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition ● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
switch. Pay special attention that the vehicle bat- Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
tery is not completely discharged. mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered ● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
and used with one vehicle. For information about extended period in an area where tem-
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. ● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SPA2038 WPD0375

OPERATING RANGE If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may PRECAUTION
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used not function.
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified ● Do not push the door handle request switch
operating range from the request switch ᭺.
1 When the Intelligent Key is within the operating with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone illustrated. The close distance to the door
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
strong radio waves are present near the operat- request switch to lock/unlock the doors. to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat- gent Key is outside the vehicle.
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly. ● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) by testing them.
from each request switch ᭺.
1
● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

WRS0806 WRS0807
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION Locking doors
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking 1. Move the selector to the P (Park) position,
the key out of your pocket or bag. push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door Key with you.
handle request switch within the range of opera- 2. Close all doors.
tion.
3. Push any door handle request switch ᭺ or
1
᭺ while carrying the Intelligent Key with
2
you.
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
WRS0808 WPD0430
NOTE:
NOTE:
CAUTION
The doors may not lock when the intelli-
● Doors lock with the door handle request ● After locking the doors using the re- gent key is in the same hand that is oper-
switch while the ignition switch is not in the quest switch, make sure that the doors ating the request switch to lock the door.
LOCK position. have been securely locked by operating Put the intelligent key in a purse, pocket or
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door the door handles or the rear liftgate your other hand.
handle request switch while any door is opener switch.
open. However, doors lock with the me- ● When locking the doors using the re-
chanical key even if any door is open. quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
● Doors do not lock with the door handle
fore operating the request switch to
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
left in the vehicle.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
side the door pockets.
side or near metallic materials.
WRS0807 WRS0808

Unlocking doors or liftgate does not unlock after returning the
handle, push the door handle request switch to
1. Carry the Intelligent Key. unlock the door and liftgate.
2. Push the door handle request switch ᭺ or
1
All doors and the liftgate will be locked automati-
᭺.
2
cally unless one of the following operations is
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the performed within 1 minute after pushing the re-
outside buzzer sounds once. quest switch.
4. Push the door handle request switch ᭺ or
1 ● Opening any door or the liftgate.
᭺ again within 5 seconds to unlock all
2
● Pushing the ignition switch.
doors.
If a door or the liftgate handle is pulled while The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds
unlocking the doors, that door or liftgate may not when a door is unlocked and the room light
be unlocked. Returning the handle to its original switch is in the DOOR position.
position will unlock the door or liftgate. If the door

10/01/07—debbie ੭

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
WPD0430 ● When the doors or the rear liftgate are open WPD0359
The interior light can be turned off without waiting or not closed securely. Locking doors
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-
ing operations. ● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
charged. tion.
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion. CAUTION 2. Close all doors.
● Locking the doors with the remote controller. When locking the doors using the Intelli- 3. Push the button on the Intelligent
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position. the vehicle.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when
CAUTION
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
After locking the doors using the Intelli- the DOOR position.
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door The light can be turned off without waiting for 15
handles. seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations.
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

WPD0360
Opening windows (if so equipped)
Unlocking doors The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simulta-
1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key. neously.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once. ● To open the windows, press the but-
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3
3. Push the button again within 5 sec- seconds after all doors are unlocked.
onds to unlock all doors.
The door windows will open while pressing
All doors will be locked automatically unless one the button on the Intelligent Key.
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the button. The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
● Opening any doors.
● Pushing the ignition switch.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
WPD0374 WPD0362
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep feature displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti- Intelligent Key.
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention vated using the Intelligent Key. See the troubleshooting guide that follows and
by pushing and holding the button on the “Vehicle information display indicator lights and
To deactivate: Press and hold the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second. warnings” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 tion.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
seconds. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
The panic alarm stops when: deactivated.
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
● it has run for 25 seconds, or To activate: Press and hold the programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
and buttons for at least 2 seconds Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key. once more. system may respond differently than expected.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis- Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
When pushing the ignition switch to stop The shift selector lever is not in the P (Park)
play and the inside warning chime sounds position.
the engine position.
continuously.
When opening the driver’s door to get out The inside warning chime sounds Push the ignition switch to the OFF
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
of the vehicle continuously. position.
The NO KEY warning appears on the Push the ignition switch to the OFF
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
and the inside warning chime sounds for position.
When closing the door after getting out of approximately 3 seconds.
the vehicle
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis- The ignition switch is in the ACC position Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
play and the outside chime sounds and the shift selector lever is not in the P position and push the ignition switch to the
continuously. (Park) position. OFF position.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for approximately A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
switch to lock the door 2 seconds. The door handle request switch is pushed Push the door handle request switch after
before the door is closed. the door is closed.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the
CAUTION
interior lights, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob:
Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,
can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation ● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.
system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” ● Do not drop the keyfob.
later in this section. For vehicles with navigation
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
system, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in
another object.
the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section later in this manual. ● Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle exceed 140°F (60°C).
before locking the doors.
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of ommends erasing the ID code of that key- LPD0209
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
effective distance depends upon the conditions authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
around the vehicle. information regarding the erasing proce-
ENTRY SYSTEM
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. Locking doors
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase 1. Close all windows.
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood and all doors.
The keyfob will not function when:
4. Push the button on the keyfob. All
● the battery is discharged.
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights
● the distance between the vehicle and the flash twice and the horn beeps once to
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). indicate all doors are locked.
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● When the button is pushed with all Push the button on the keyfob again within
doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash 5 seconds.
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked. ● All doors unlock.

● If a door is open and you push the ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
button, the doors will lock but the horn will doors are completely closed.
not beep and the hazard warning lights will The interior lights can be turned off without wait-
not flash. ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles ignition and turning to the ON or START position,
without navigation system, refer to “Silencing the locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the
horn beep feature” later in this section. For ve- interior light switch to the off position.
hicles with navigation system, refer to “Comfort &
convenience settings” in the “Display screen, Auto relock
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec- LPD0210 When the button on the keyfob is pushed,
tion later in this manual.
Unlocking doors all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is per-
Push the button on the keyfob once. formed:
● Only the driver’s door unlocks. ● Any door is opened.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
doors are completely closed with the ignition
the key is turned from OFF to ON.
key in any position except the ON position.
● The interior lights turn on and the light timer Opening windows (if so equipped)
activates for 30 seconds when the interior The keyfob allows you to open the front windows
light switch is in the DOOR position with the simultaneously.
ignition key in any position except the ON
position. ● To open the front windows, press the
button on the keyfob for longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The door windows will open while pressing
the button on the keyfob.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the keyfob.
Linking the keyfob to automatic drive
positioner memory
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory
setting.
See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-
tion.
LPD0211 LPD0262
Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep feature
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention vated using the keyfob.
by pushing and holding the button on the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. NOTE:
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 If you change the horn beep and lamp flash
seconds. feature with the keyfob, the display screen
The panic alarm stops when: (if so equipped) will not show the current
mode and cannot be used to change the
● it has run for 25 seconds, or mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-
● any button is pushed on the keyfob. vious mode and re-enable the display
screen control.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

HOOD

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
WARNING
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated. ● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
To activate: Press and hold the ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
and buttons for at least 2 seconds open and result in an accident.
once more.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the the engine compartment, to avoid injury
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn do not open the hood.
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Using the interior lights
LPD0302
Push the button on the keyfob once to turn
on the interior lights. ᭺
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel. The
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” hood will spring up slightly.
in the “Instruments and controls” section earlier in
this manual. ᭺
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
᭺
3 Insert the support rod into the slot on the
underside of the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make
sure it locks into place.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LIFT GATE

WARNING
● Always be sure the lift gate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving.
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-
fore closing the lift gate.
LPD0300 LPD0251
The power door lock system allows you to lock or LIFT GATE RELEASE
unlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-
neously. If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked with
the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a
To open the lift gate, press the hatch release discharged battery, follow these steps:
switch under the license finisher to release the
latch. Pull the lift gate open. 1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift
gate.
To close, lower and gently push the lift gate
down. The power latch will engage to securely 2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.
latch the lift gate.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

GLASS HATCH FUEL-FILLER DOOR

NOTE:
The lift gate must be unlocked in order to
open the glass hatch.

WARNING
Do not drive with the glass hatch open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust
gas” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

LPD0301 WPD0436
To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle to OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LID
release the glass hatch, then pull up on the glass
hatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatch Pull on the finger tab to open.
down securely.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WARNING ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and can cause an explosion of flammable
highly explosive under certain condi- liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
tions. You could be burned or seriously trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injured if it is misused or mishandled. injury or death when filling portable fuel
Always stop the engine and do not containers:
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling. – Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off – Do not use electronic devices when
automatically. Continued refueling may filling.
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel – Keep the pump nozzle in contact
spray and possibly a fire. with the container while you are fill-
LPD0253
● Use only an original equipment type ing it.
FUEL-FILLER CAP fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a – Use only approved portable fuel con-
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the built-in safety valve needed for proper tainers for flammable liquid.
operation of the fuel system and emis-
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
sion control system. An incorrect cap
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
can result in a serious malfunction and
heard. possible injury. It could also cause the
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder ᭺ while
1 malfunction indicator light to come on.
refueling. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so
equipped)

CAUTION
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
nate. If the light illuminates be-
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
LPD0304 LPD0305
The light should turn off after a
TILT OPERATION The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-
few driving trips. If the light justed for driving comfort.
does not turn off after a few driving WARNING Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a Do not adjust the steering wheel while brake and accelerator pedal position forward ᭺
1
NISSAN dealer. driving. You could lose control of your or backward ᭺. Pedal adjustment can only be
2
● For additional information, see the vehicle and cause an accident. performed when:
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the ● Ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC posi-
the “Instruments and Controls” section
steering wheel up or down to the desired position
earlier in this manual.
tion.
● Ignition switch is ON and the selector lever
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel is in the P (Park) position
in place.
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-
justed separately.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SUN VISORS

CAUTION ᭺
3 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)
in or out as needed.
Do not adjust the pedal position with your
foot on the pedal. CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-
edly downward.

WPD0315

᭺
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
2 To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MIRRORS

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims according to the intensity of the head-
lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic
anti-glare feature operates is activated when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
WPD0307 WPD0126 ᭺ or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
1
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
VANITY MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) sensors, resulting in improper operation.
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor The night position ᭺ reduces glare from the
1
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
Use the day position ᭺ when driving in daylight
2
mirror cover is open.
hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Do not hang objects over the sensor ᭺ or apply
1
glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce
the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in im-
proper operation.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.
For more information about the ᭺ compass and
2
compass features (if so equipped), refer to
“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section.

LPD0446 LPD0447
Type A Type B
Type A Type B
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the button as described: the button as described:
● To turn off the anti-glare feature, push ● To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
the button. The indicator light will turn press the button. The indicator light
off. will turn off.
● To turn on the anti-glare feature, push ● To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,
the button again. The indicator light press the button again. The indicator
will turn on. light will turn on.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Do not hang objects over the sensor ᭺ or apply
1
WARNING
glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce
the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in im- ● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
proper operation. the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto- right. Using only this mirror could cause
matic anti-glare feature is operating. an accident. Use the inside mirror or
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans- glance over your shoulder to properly
ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkா Universal judge distances to other objects.
Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec- ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
tion of this manual. You could lose control of your vehicle
For information on the ᭺ compass and compass
2 and cause an accident.
features, see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ment and controls” section of this manual. Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
LPD0237
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
OUTSIDE MIRRORS defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside
The outside mirror remote control will operate mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.
position.
Move the small switch ᭺ to select the right or left
1
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
using the large switch ᭺.2


10/01/07—debbie ੭

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The The automatic drive positioner system has two
selected mirror will turn downward. features:
The selected mirror surface will return to its origi- ● Memory storage function
nal position when any of the following have oc-
● Entry/exit function
curred:
● The shift selector lever is moved to any po-
sition other than R (Reverse).
● The outside mirror control switch is set to the
N (Neutral) position.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.

NOTE:
LPD0259
If the outside mirror control switch is in the
Foldable outside mirrors neutral position, neither mirror will turn
downward when the shift selector lever is
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. moved to R (Reverse).
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so For more information regarding this feature, refer
equipped) to “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-
tion.
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-
lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-
vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or
right position. Only one mirror can be selected at
a time.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the tion.
desired positions by manually operating 2. While the indicator light for the memory
each adjusting switch. For additional infor- switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, onds, press the button on the keyfob.
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- The indicator light will blink. After the indica-
tem” section and “Pedal position adjust- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that
ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this memory setting.
section.
With the key removed from the ignition switch or
During this step, do not turn the ignition to the ignition switch is moved to OFF, press
any position other than ON. the button on the keyfob. The driver’s seat,
accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mir-
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, rors will move to the memorized position.
push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at
LPD0306
least 1 second. NOTE:
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
The indicator light for the pushed memory If a new memory position is saved to the
Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator switch will come on and stay on for approxi- memory switch, the keyfob automatically
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. re-links.
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. After the indicator light goes off, the se-
Follow these procedures to use the memory sys- lected positions are stored in the selected Confirming memory storage
tem. memory (1 or 2). ● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
1. Set the automatic transmission selector le- If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch. If the main memory has not been
ver to the P (Park) position. switch, the previous memory will be deleted. stored, the indicator light will come on for
approximately 0.5 seconds. When the
2. Turn the ignition ON. Linking a keyfob to a stored memory memory has stored the position, the indica-
position tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-
onds.
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-
ing procedure.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-
fuse opens, the memory storage function will and outside mirrors will move to the memorized celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see
be canceled and must be restarted before a position with the indicator light blinking, and then “Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Display
stored memory position can be set again. the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to tems” section of this manual. For vehicles without
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
restart the memory storage function. You navigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.
can also restart the memory storage function This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
using the following procedure. will automatically move when the shift selector Restarting the entry/exit function
lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more
fuse. opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
easily.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than The driver’s seat will slide backward: restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart
two times with the ignition key in the LOCK the entry/exit function using the following proce-
position. ● When the key is removed from the ignition
switch and the driver’s door is opened. dure.
Once the memory storage function has been 1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
● When the driver’s door is opened with the
restarted, you can store a memory position. fuse.
ignition key turned to LOCK.
See “Memory storage function” earlier in this
section. ● When the ignition key is turned from ACC to 2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
LOCK with the driver’s door open. two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
Selecting the memorized position position.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-
Set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position: The entry/exit function should now work properly.
tion, then:
● When the key is inserted into the ignition SYSTEM OPERATION
● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s switch and the driver’s door is closed.
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully The automatic drive positioner system will not
● When the driver’s door is closed with the key work or will stop operating under the following
for at least 1 second, or turned to LOCK. conditions:
● Turn the ignition switch to the ON position ● When the key is turned from ACC to ON
and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for ● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
while the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) km/h).
at least 1 second. position.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat is turned on while the automatic drive
positioner is operating.
● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not
pushed and held for at least 1 second.
● When the seat has been already moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
● When the shift selector lever is moved from
P (Park) to any other position.
● When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.
The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-
tion system, see “Comfort & convenience set-
tings” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-
tioner and audio systems” section of this manual.
For vehicles without navigation system, see your
NISSAN dealer.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen without Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-41
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Control panel buttons — color screen with Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-49
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 CompactFlash™ (CF) player operation
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Music Box hard-disk drive audio system Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
CD/CF (CompactFlash™) care and cleaning. . . . . . 4-84 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Remote audio system controls During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES) Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Navigation System (for Canada – if so equipped) . . .4-115
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118
Before operating the DVD mobile Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118
entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122
Remote control operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-123
How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101 Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-124
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103 Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition System
Navigation System (for U.S. – if so equipped). . . . . . .4-104 (for U.S. – if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106 NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-126
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129 Command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-150
Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-162
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-163
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137 Voice command learning function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-164
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-144 Voice recognition settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-167
Speaker Adaptation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-146 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-169
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-149
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(for Canada – if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-150

10/01/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. WHA0881
1. NISSAN controller (P. 4-5) 5. INFO button (P. 4-6)
2. STATUS button (P. 4-6) 6. – (brightness control) button
3. + (brightness control) button 7. SETTING button (P. 4-11)
4. OFF brightness control button (P. 8. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-5)
4-17)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

10/01/07—debbie ੭

When you use this system, make sure the engine If you press the BACK button ᭺ during setup,
4
is running. the setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long ● Finish setup.
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
In some screens pressing the BACK button ᭺
4
engine will not start.
accepts the changes made during setup.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
WHA0883
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN
CONTROLLER
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on
the display screen. Select an item on the display
using the main directional buttons ᭺ or the
2
center dial ᭺. Then press the ENTER button ᭺
3 1
to select the item or perform the action.
The BACK button ᭺ button has two functions:
4

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

10/01/07—debbie ੭

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and
select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for that screen (for example, 5/6).
5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted (for example, Enhances stereo imag-
ing and sound).

LHA0914
HOW TO USE THE STATUS LHA0915
BUTTON
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
SCREEN To display the status of the audio, climate control
system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS Press the INFO button. The display screen
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis- button. shows vehicle information for your convenience.
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec- The information shown on the screen should be a
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different The following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pressed: guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
areas on the screen provide you with important See the following for details.
information. See the following for details. Audio → Audio and climate control system →
1. Header: Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-
Shows the path used to get to the current erage fuel economy and distance to empty →
screen (for example, press the SETTING Audio
button > then select the “Audio” key).
2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).

10/01/07—debbie ੭

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be dis-
played.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
LHA0921 display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 LHA0922
mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the Fuel economy record
Fuel economy battery cables, the display might show (**.*).
Press the INFO button then select the “Fuel Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Resetting fuel economy Economy” key, then select the “View” key using
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel The average fuel economy calculation can be the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the button.
Record. “Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key The average fuel consumption history will be
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN- displayed in a graph form along with the average
Distance to empty (MI or km) TER button. fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition
and the temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-
played on the screen:
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
LHA0923 LHA0924
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
Tire pressure information light will remain on after 1 minute. Con- Trip computer
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
To display tire pressure information, press the possible for tire replacement and/or Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip
INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key system resetting. Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN- press the ENTER button.
TER button. ● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the The trip computer will display the following items:
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi- proper operation of the TPMS.
● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last
cates that the pressure is being measured. After
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
minutes.
be displayed randomly.
● Driving Distance – Distance driven (mile or
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
km) since the last reset.
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position. ● Average Speed – Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Resetting the trip computer
Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.
Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to
be reset using the NISSAN controller and press
the ENTER button.
To reset all of the items in the trip computer select
the “Reset ALL” key and press the ENTER button.
A confirmation screen will appear. Select the
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

LHA0925 LHA0926
Maintenance items Changing the maintenance interval
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte- Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using
nance” key using the NISSAN controller and the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
press the ENTER button; the maintenance infor- button to display the screen to change the main-
mation will be displayed on the screen. tenance interval.
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-
troller and press the ENTER button. Use the
NISSAN controller to change the maintenance
interval; to accept the changes press the BACK
button.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Resetting the maintenance interval ● The ignition key is turned ON the next time
the vehicle will be driven.
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0
miles (km), select the “Reset Distance” key using To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
button. the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
● The “Reset” key is selected.
● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
● The maintenance interval is set again.
LHA0839
Displaying the maintenance notice re-
minder
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press
the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte-
nance interval. The indicator light will illuminate
when it is ON.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-
tomatically displayed as shown when both of the
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0927 WHA0937 LHA0929
Type A Type B Display settings
HOW TO USE THE SETTING
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER
BUTTON button. The Display settings screen will appear.
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-
TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set and press the ENTER button.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

To turn the screen on:
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key. Then set the screen to on by press-
ing the ENTER button, or
● Hold the OFF button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-
ing display” will appear and the “Display ON”
key will be automatically turned on (no am-
ber indicator).
Background color
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
LHA0930 WHA0823 color changes between day and night.
Brightness/contrast: Display off: The new settings are automatically saved when
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map “Display ON” turns amber and the message button or any other mode button.
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con- HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
trast to lower or higher. button on the control panel is operated, the dis-
play turns on for that operation. If one of the
The new settings are automatically saved when
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
not automatically turn off until that operation is
button or any other mode button.
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Daylight Savings Time:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0931 LHA0932
Beeps settings Clock
Select the “Beeps” key and press the ENTER The following display will appear after pressing
button. The Beeps settings screen will appear. the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a key using the NISSAN controller and pressing
beep will sound if any control panel button is the ENTER button.
pressed. On-screen Clock:
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
Clock Format:
Choose either the 12h (12 hour) clock display or
the 24h (24 hour) clock display.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Atlantic
● Newfoundland
● Aleutian
● Hawaii
● Alaska

LHA0933 LHA0943
Time Zone: Clock Adjust:
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone Adjust the time by manually inputting the correct
screen will appear. time.
Select one of the following zones, depending on ● 0 – 9:
the current location, by selecting the correct time Select to change the number in the display.
zone key and pressing the ENTER button to
● Modify:
enable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-
Select to change the number at the cursor
nate for that location). position.
● Pacific ● >:
● Mountain Select to move the cursor position to the
right.
● Central
● <:
● Eastern Select to move the cursor position to the left.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● OK:
Select to accept the changes made and
return to the clock setting display.
After selection/settings, press the BACK button
or any other mode button to accept the changes.

LHA1015 LHA1016
Comfort & Convenience settings (if so Indicator light is illuminated — ON
equipped) Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-
ton. The comfort and convenience option screen
will be displayed.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The
indicator light, box at the left of the selected item,
alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER
button is pressed.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Auto interior illumination: Select to turn on or NOTE:
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
any door is unlocked. flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
Speed sensing wiper interval: Select to turn not be changed with the display. Use the
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati- keyfob to return to the previous mode and
cally according to the vehicle speed. re-enable the display control.

Remote key response horn: Select to turn on Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of
or turn off the horn beep mode used when the time before doors automatically re-lock.
LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed. Selective door unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
NOTE: after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will LHA0934
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
not be changed with the display. Use the the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock Language / Units
keyfob to return to the previous mode and operation is performed again within 5 seconds.
re-enable the display control. Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.
Remote key response lights: Select to turn on be unlocked after the door unlock operation is Select which setting you want to change using
or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used performed once. the NISSAN controller and selecting either the
when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the key- “Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key
fob is pressed. Reset all settings to default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems by pressing the ENTER button.
to their default settings.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

OFF BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the OFF button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
night display. Then, adjust the brightness
by using the NISSAN controller.
The display brightness can also be adjusted us-
ing the + (brighter) button or the Ϫ (dimmer)
button.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the OFF button for more
LHA0935 LHA0936 than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the
Select Language: Select Units: button again to turn the display on.
Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the Select the “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) key or the “Met-
“Español” key to change the language shown on ric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
the display. shown on the display.
Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” later in
this section.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-19)
10. ROUTE button*
11. ZOOM IN button*
12. MAP button*
13. ZOOM OUT button*
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
**For information on the PHONE button, see
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” later in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
LHA0880 ENTER button — This is a button on the control
1. STATUS button (P. 4-22) 5. OFF brightness control button (P. panel.
4-35) “Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
2. DEST button*
6. INFO button (P. 4-22) By selecting this key, you can proceed to the next
3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-19) function.
7. SETTING button (P. 4-27)
4. PHONE button**
8. VOICE button*

10/01/07—debbie ੭

If you press the BACK button ᭺ during setup,
4
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will or car fragrance on the display. Contact
return to the previous screen. with liquid will cause the system to
● Finish setup. malfunction.

In some screens pressing the BACK button ᭺
4 To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
accepts the changes made during setup. not be operated while driving.

For the VOICE button ᭺ functions, refer to the
5 The on-screen functions that are not available
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH ate the navigation system.
SCREEN

LHA0882 CAUTION
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN ● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
CONTROLLER display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on not touch the liquid crystalline material,
the display screen. Select an item on the display which contains a small amount of mer-
using the main directional buttons ᭺ (certain
2 cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
Navigation System functions use the additional immediately with soap and water.
directional buttons ᭺) or the center dial ᭺.
6 3 ● To clean the display, never use a rough
Then press the ENTER button ᭺ to select the
1 cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
item or perform the action. kind of solvent or paper towel with a
The BACK button ᭺ button has two functions:
4 chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WHA0885 WHA0887 WHA0889
Touch screen operation Adjusting the item: Inputting characters:
With this system, the same operations as those Touch the “+” key ᭺ or the “Ϫ” key ᭺ to adjust
1 2 Touch the letter or number key ᭺.
1
for the NISSAN controller are possible using the the settings. Touch the “UP” key ᭺ to scroll up to
3
the previous page, or touch the “DOWN” key ᭺ 4 There are some options available when inputting
touch screen operation.
to scroll down to next page. characters.
Selecting the item:
● Uppercase:
Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio” key, Shows uppercase characters.
touch the “Audio” key ᭺ on the screen. Touch
1
the “BACK” key ᭺ to return to the previous
2 ● Lowercase:
screen. Shows lowercase characters.
● Space:
Inserts a space.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Symbols: 2. Menu Selections:
Shows symbols such as the question mark Shows the options to choose within that
(?). menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-
mination, etc.).
● Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been 3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:
input with one touch. Touch and hold the Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
“Delete” key to delete all of the characters. used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and
select more options.
● OK:
Completes the character input. 4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
Touch screen maintenance able for that screen (for example, 1/14).
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft 5. Footer/Information Line:
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a Provides more information (if available)
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft LHA0890
about the menu selection currently high-
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de- HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the unlocking doors).
screen. SCREEN
START-UP SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-
When you push the ignition switch to the ACC or tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different
ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is areas on the screen provide you with important
displayed on the screen. When you read and information. See the following for details.
agree with the warning, press the ENTER button.
1. Header:
If you do not push the ENTER button, you will not Shows the path used to get to the current
be able to use the navigation system. screen (for example, press the SETTING
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate button > then select the “Comfort & Conv.”
Navigation System Owner’s Manual. key).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

HOW TO USE THE STATUS
BUTTON
To display the status of the audio, climate control
system, fuel consumption and navigation system,
press the STATUS button.
The following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pressed:
Audio → Audio and Climate control system →
Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-
erage fuel economy and distance to empty →
Audio, climate control temperature settings and
Navigation System → Audio
LHA0892 LHA0893
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Fuel economy
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
vehicle and navigation information for your con- Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and
venience. press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel
The information shown on the screen should be a Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. Record.
See the following for details. Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

10/01/07—debbie ੭

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be dis-
played.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 LHA0894 LHA0895
mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the Fuel economy record
battery cables, the display might show (**.*). Tire pressure information
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel To display tire pressure information, press the
Resetting fuel economy Economy” key, then select the “View” key using INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key
The average fuel economy calculation can be the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER using the NISSAN controller and press the EN-
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the button.
TER button.
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key The average fuel consumption history will be
using the NISSAN controller and press the EN- Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-
displayed in a graph form along with the average
TER button. fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period. cates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the Resetting the trip computer
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition
Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.
and the temperature.
Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to
In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis- be reset using the NISSAN controller and press
played on the screen: the ENTER button.
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires. To reset all of the items in the trip computer select
the “Reset ALL” key and press the ENTER button.
WARNING A confirmation screen will appear; select the
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
LHA0896
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con- Trip computer
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip
system resetting. Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the The trip computer will display the following items:
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
minutes.
● Driving Distance – Distance driven (miles or
km) since the last reset.
● Average Speed – Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Resetting the maintenance interval
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0
miles (km), select the “Reset Distance” key using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button.

LHA0897 LHA0898
Maintenance items Changing the maintenance interval
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte- Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using
nance” key using the NISSAN controller and the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
press the ENTER button; the maintenance infor- button to display the screen to change the main-
mation will be displayed on the screen. tenance interval.
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-
troller and press the ENTER button. Use the
NISSAN controller to change the maintenance
interval, to accept the changes, press the BACK
button.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● The ignition key is turned ON the next time
the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
● The “Reset” key is selected.
● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
● The maintenance interval is set again.
LHA0839 LHA0908
Displaying the maintenance notice re- Other items
minder
Press the INFO button and select the “Others”
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press key using the NISSAN controller and press the
the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE ENTER button to view information on the naviga-
INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte- tion and voice recognition systems.
nance interval. The indicator light will illuminate
when it is ON.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-
tomatically displayed as shown when both of the
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Navigation version
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Traffic Info.
Where am I?
GPS Satellite Info.
LHA0899 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- LHA0884
Voice recognition er’s Manual for information regarding this item. HOW TO USE THE SETTING
If you use the voice recognition system for the BUTTON
first time or you do not know how to operate it, When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-
you can display the voice command list or the TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
user guide for confirmation. For more information, select and/or adjust several functions, features
see “NISSAN voice recognition system” later in and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
this section. the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set and press the ENTER button.
Command List:
Displays a list of voice commands that will work
with the system.
User Guide:
Displays a simplified operation manual of the
voice recognition system and how to use the
voice commands.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0901 LHA0902 WHA0823
Display settings Brightness/contrast: Display off:
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the
button. The Display settings screen will appear. to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map “Display ON” turns amber and the message
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con- HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
trast to lower or higher. button on the control panel is operated, the dis-
play turns on for that operation. If one of the
The new settings are automatically saved when
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
not automatically turn off until that operation is
button or any other mode button.
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

To turn the screen on: Clock Format:
● Press the SETTING button and select the Choose either the 12h (12 hour) clock display or
“Display” key and then select the “Display the 24h (24 hour) clock display.
ON” key. Then set the screen to on by press-
Offset Adjust:
ing the ENTER button, or
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per
● Hold the OFF button for approxi-
minute.
mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-
ing display” will appear and the “Display ON” Daylight Savings Time:
key will be automatically turned on (no am-
ber indicator). When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
Background color daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will disappear.
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night. LHA0904
The new settings are automatically saved when Clock
button or any other mode button. The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key using the NISSAN controller and pressing
the ENTER button.
On-screen Clock:
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Atlantic
● Newfoundland
● Hawaii
● Alaska
After selection/settings, press the BACK button
or any other mode button to accept the changes.

LHA0905 LHA0938
Time Zone: Comfort & Convenience settings
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the
screen will appear. NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-
ton. The comfort and convenience option screen
Select one of the following zones, depending on
will be displayed.
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key and pressing the ENTER button to You can set the following operating conditions by
enable that time zone (indicator light will illumi- selecting the desired item using the NISSAN
nate for that location). controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The
indicator light, box at the right of the selected
● Pacific item, alternately turns on and off each time the
● Mountain ENTER button is pressed.

● Central
● Eastern

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Remote key response horn: Select to turn on
or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the
LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Remote key response lights: Select to turn on
or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used
when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the key-
LHA0939 LHA0940
fob is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON Auto interior illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when NOTE:
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
any door is unlocked.
Auto headlights sensitivity: Select to adjust flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher not be changed with the display. Use the
(right) or lower (left). keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Auto headlights off delay: Select to change
the duration of the automatic headlight off timer Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of
from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second time before doors automatically re-lock.
periods. Selective door unlock: When this item is
Speed sensing wiper interval: Select to turn turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati- after the door unlock operation. When the door
cally according to the vehicle speed. handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,

10/01/07—debbie ੭

only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock moves to the previous position.
operation is performed again within 5 seconds. Reset all settings to default: Select to
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will change all the comfort and convenience systems
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is to their default settings.
performed once.
Intelligent Key lock / unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
Intelligent Key lock reply: Select to change
the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when
a door handle request switch is pushed to lock.
LHA0909
Select to turn off all sounds made when a door
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the Others settings
“OFF” key. Select the “Others” key by using the NISSAN
Intelligent Key unlock reply: Select to change controller and pressing the ENTER button. Voice
the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when recognition, language and units setting screen
a door handle request switch is pushed to unlock. will be displayed.

Select to turn off all sounds made when a door
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the
“OFF” key.
Slide driver seat back on exit: Select to turn
on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwards
for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Voice Command Learning
Select this item to have the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system learn the user’s voice.
The system can memorize the voices of up to
three persons. For the details of this func-
tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
system” later in this section.
● User Guide
Select this item to learn the operation flow of
the NISSAN Voice Recognition system with
the help of a step-by-step guide.

LHA0910 LHA0911
Voice Recognition: Language / Units
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Voice Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-
Recognition” key and press the ENTER button; guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.
the following options will be displayed: Select which setting you want to change using
the NISSAN controller and selecting either the
● Command List
“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key
Displays the voice command list on the
by pressing the ENTER button.
screen.
● Minimize Voice Feedback
When this item is turned to ON, vocal feed-
back is reduced if the voice recognition sys-
tem is activated.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Volume and beeps settings
Navigation volume
For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-
mation regarding these settings.
Phone volume
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation Sys-
tem” later in this section.

LHA0912 LHA0913
Select Language: Select Units:
Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to Select the “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) key or the “Met-
change the language shown on the display. ric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.
Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” later in
this section.
Navigation settings
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-
tings.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)

OFF BUTTON When the shift selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the
To change the display brightness, press view directly to the rear of the vehicle.
the OFF button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
WARNING
night display. Then, adjust the brightness
by using the NISSAN controller. ● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary ob-
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the jects to help avoid damaging the ve-
display will return to the previous display. hicle. The system will not detect small
Press and hold the OFF button for more objects below the bumper, and may not
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the detect objects close to the bumper or
button again to turn the display on. on the ground.
● The rearview camera is a convenience
WHA0903 but it is not a substitute for proper back-
Beep setting ing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a back up slowly.
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed. ● Objects viewed in the rearview monitor
differ from actual distance because a
Phone settings wide-angle lens is used.
For phone settings refer to “Bluetoothா Hands- ● Make sure that the lift gate is securely
Free Phone System With Navigation System” closed when backing up.
later in this section. ● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled beside the license plate light.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning LHA0437 LHA1021
dirt or snow from the cover. They are indicated as reference distances to ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED cate distances from the back bumper line ᭺ inA To adjust the quality of the screen, press the
LINES the illustration. SETTING button.

Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and ᭺
1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red ● To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
distances to objects with reference to the Tint, Color, Contrast, and Black Level of the
bumper line ᭺ are displayed on the monitor.
A ᭺
2 3 ft (1 m) yellow rearview monitor, press the SETTING button
with the rearview monitor on, then touch one
᭺
3 7 ft (2 m) green
of the adjustment keys. Press the “–” or “+”
᭺
4 10 ft (3 m) green key on the item and adjust the level.
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than ● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint
the actual clearance. and Color of the rearview monitor while the
vehicle is moving.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

OPERATING TIPS ● The colors of objects on the rearview moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
● When the selector lever is shifted to R (Re- actual object.
verse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the rearview monitor mode. ● When the contrast of objects is low at night,
However, the radio can be heard. pressing the SETTING button may not
change the brightness.
● It may take some time until the rearview
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
monitor is displayed after the selector lever
dark place or at night.
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the rear- ● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
view monitor screen is displayed completely. the rearview monitor may not display ob-
When the selector lever is returned to a jects. Clean the camera.
position other than R (Reverse), it may take ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
some time until the screen changes. Objects clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
on the screen may be distorted until they are tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
completely displayed. dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob- ● Do not damage the camera as the monitor
jects. This is not a malfunction. screen may be adversely affected.
● When strong light directly enters the cam- ● Do not use body wax on the camera window.
era, objects may not be displayed clearly. Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

VENTILATORS

LHA0488 WHA0510
Rear center console ventilators (if so
equipped)
Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-
senger side windows ᭺, driver and passenger
1
front ᭺ center ᭺, rear passenger compartment
2 3
᭺ and rear center console (if so equipped)
4
ventilators ᭺ by moving the ventilator slide
5
and/or ventilator assemblies.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals. LHA0489

● Do not use the recirculation mode for 1. Fan control dial Air flow control dial
long periods as it may cause the interior 2. Temperature control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air to become stale and the windows to 3. Air flow control dial
air flow outlets.
fog up. 4. Air conditioner button
5. Rear window defroster button MAX — Air flows from center and side
A/C vents with maximum cooling.
6. Air recirculation button
— Air flows from center and side
CONTROLS ventilators.
— Air flows from center and side
Fan control dial ventilators and foot outlets.
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and — Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
controls fan speed. — Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Temperature control dial Air conditioner button 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the sired position between the middle and the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase desired (1 to 4) position and push the hot position.
the temperature, turn the dial to the right. button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator
light on the button will come on. Push Ventilation
Air recirculation button the button again to turn off the air condi- This mode directs outside air to the side and
tioner. The indicator light on the button will center ventilators.
ON position (Indicator light on): go off.
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. 1. Push the button to the off position.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
Push the button to the on position when: ates only when the engine is running. 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
● driving on a dusty road. position.
Rear window defroster switch
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
For more information about the rear window de- tion.
senger compartment.
froster switch, see “Rear window defroster
● for maximum cooling when using the air con- switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
ditioner. of this manual. sired position.
OFF position (Indicator light off): HEATER OPERATION Defrosting or defogging
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
ment and distributed through the selected outlet. Heating defrost/defog the windows.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con- This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
ditioner operation. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost position.
outlets.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
1. Push the button to the off position for tion.
normal heating.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the sired position between the middle and the
position. hot position.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. Operating tips
dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
temperature control lever to the full HOT
sired position. and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
position.
improves heater operation.
● When the position is selected, the air Heating and defogging
conditioner automatically turns on (however, This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the shield. so equipped)
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). The air conditioning system will con- 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
tinue to operate until the fan control dial is position. desired (1 - 4) position, and push in the
turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even button to activate the air conditioner. When the
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying
if the air flow control dial is turned to a tion.
position other than the position. This functions are added to the heater operation.
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- The air conditioner cooling function oper-
windshield. The mode automatically sired position between the middle and the
ates only when the engine is running.
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn hot position.
into the passenger compartment to further ● When the position is selected, the air Cooling
improve the defogging performance. conditioner automatically turns on (however, This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
Bi-level heating the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F 1. Push the button to the off position.
This mode directs cooler air from the side and (2°C). The air conditioning system will con- 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets. tinue to operate until the fan control dial is position.
When the temperature control dial is moved to turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even
the full hot or full cool position, the air between if the air flow control dial is turned to a 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem- position other than the position. This tion.
perature. dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
4. Push the button. The indicator light
windshield. The mode automatically
1. Push the button to the off position. comes on.
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the into the passenger compartment to further 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
position. improve the defogging performance. sired position.

10/02/07—debbie ੭

● For quick cooling when the outside tem- 3. Push the button. The indicator light ● The air conditioning system should be
perature is high, push the button to comes on. operated for approximately 10 minutes
the on position (indicator light on). Be sure at least once a month. This helps pre-
When the or are selected, the air
to return the button to the off position vent damage to the system due to lack
conditioner automatically turns on (however, the
for normal cooling. of lubrication.
indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside
Dehumidified heating temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). The air ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
conditioning system will continue to operate until ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is turned malfunction.
1. Push the button to the off position. to a position other than the position. This
● If the engine coolant temperature
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the dehumidifies the air which helps defog the wind-
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
position. shield. The mode automatically turns off,
perature over the normal range, turn
allowing outside air to be drawn into the passen-
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- the air conditioner off. See “If your
ger compartment to further improve the defog-
tion. vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
ging performance.
emergency” section of this manual.
4. Push the button. The indicator light 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
comes on. sired position. AIR FLOW CHARTS
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- Operating tips The following charts show the button and dial
sired position. positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
● Keep the windows and moonroof (if so cooling or defrosting. For additional information
Dehumidified defogging equipped) closed while the air conditioner is on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-
in operation. ditioner” in this section”. The air recirculation
This mode is used to defog the windows and ( ) button should always be in the OFF
dehumidify the air. ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
position for heating and defrosting.
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the air from the passenger compartment. Then,
position. close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.


10/02/07—debbie ੭

WHA0780 WHA0781


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WHA0782 WHA0783


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WHA1063


10/01/07—debbie ੭

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)

● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.

LHA0859
1. Driver temperature control dial/AUTO WARNING
button
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
2. A/C ON/OFF button
erates only when the engine is running.
3. Fan speed control (increase)
4. Front window defroster button ● Do not leave children or adults who
5. MODE button would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
6. Passenger temperature control dial/
should also not be left alone. They
DUAL button could accidentally injure themselves or
7. System OFF others through inadvertent operation of
8. Fan speed control (decrease) the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
9. Rear window defroster button temperatures in a closed vehicle could
10. Air recirculation button quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER

Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be
controlled from both the front seat overhead con-
sole controls or the rear seat controls (on back of
center console).
Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control
of the rear climate functions to the rear passen-
ger’s.
To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine
must be running.
If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the air
conditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fan
speed positions, air is discharged from the rear
vents at the corresponding speed.
LHA0628 WHA0630
Rear sear rear climate controls
1. Rear fan speed control dial
2. Rear temperature control dial
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and
off, and controls fan speed.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows rear passen-
gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- RADIO Reception conditions will constantly change be-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
the environment in mind. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position signal distance and interference from other ve-
and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF (power) hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio scribed below are some of the factors that can
ozone layer. with the engine not running, the key should be affect your radio reception.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is returned to the ACC position.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
Radio reception is affected by station signal cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality nate the noise.
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual. normally are caused by these external influences. FM RADIO RECEPTION
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
mentally friendly” air conditioning system. hicle may influence radio reception quality. (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
Radio reception having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
WARNING nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
The air conditioner system contains re- Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with station reception even if the FM station is within
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
personal injury, any air conditioner ser- dio reception. These circuits are designed to directly related to the distance between the
vice should be done only by an experi- extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
enced technician with proper equipment. ity of that reception. of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
However there are some general characteristics off objects.
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
when the finest equipment is used. These char- a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position equipped)
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter) static or flutter can When the satellite radio is first installed or the
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may
treble control to reduce treble response. not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective the vehicle outside of any metal or large building
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The data.
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound. The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
AM RADIO RECEPTION stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
bend around objects and skip along the ground. in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the Satellite radio performance may be affected if
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- signal.
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several affect satellite radio performance. Remove the LHA0099
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in ice to restore satellite radio reception
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Compact disc (CD) player ● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. ● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
CAUTION dirty, scratched or covered with finger- PRESS EJECT:
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD prints may not work properly.
This is an error due to excessive tem-
insert slot. This could damage the CD ● The following CDs may not work prop- perature inside the player. Remove the
and/or CD changer/player. erly: CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
closed could damage the CD and/or CD can be played when the temperature of
changer. ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) the player returns to normal.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) UNPLAYABLE:
player at a time.
● Do not use the following CDs as they The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) may cause the CD player to malfunction:
tem (only MP3 CD).
round discs that have the “COMPACT ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc CompactFlash™ (CF) player
or packaging. ● CDs that are not round
● Do not force a CF card into the slot. This
● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● CDs with a paper label could damage the CF card and/or player.
player may malfunction due to the hu- ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or ● During cold weather or rainy days, the player
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD have abnormal edges may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
and dehumidify or ventilate the player occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify
● This audio system can only play pre-
completely.
recorded CDs. It has no capability to or ventilate the player completely.
● The player may skip while driving on record or burn CDs.
● The CF player sometimes cannot function
rough roads.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the when the passenger compartment tempera-
● The CD player sometimes cannot func- following messages will be displayed. ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
tion when the compartment tempera- perature before use.
CHECK DISC:
ture is extremely high or low.
● Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.
Decrease/increase the temperature ● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
before use. rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.). ● Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash™ ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of * Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-
(CF) with MP3 or WMA bits per second used by a digital music file. tered trademarks and trademarks of the Mi-
The size and quality of a compressed digital crosoft Corporation in the United States of
Terms: audio file is determined by the bit rate used America and/or other countries.
when encoding the file.
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures CompactFlash™ is a trademark of the SanDiskா
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency Corporation in the United States of America
most well-known compressed digital audio is the rate at which the samples of a signal and/or other countries.
file format. This format allows for near “CD are converted from analog to digital (A/D
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of conversion) per second.
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: methods for writing data to media. Writing
44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no data once to the media is called a single
perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres- session, and writing more than once is called
sion removes the redundant and irrelevant a multisession.
parts of a sound signal that the human ear ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
doesn’t hear. part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a contains information about the digital music
compressed audio format created by Mi- file such as song title, artist, album title,
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
codec offers greater file compression than ID3 tag information is displayed on the
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA1078
Playback order chart


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems
CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
versions*1 WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Tag information
WMA tag (WMA only)
With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Folder levels
Without navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
With navigation system: 128 characters
Text character number limitation
Without navigation system: 64 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
Displayable character codes*3
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names
and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applica-
tions or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
before the music starts playing.
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
next song when playing player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order


10/01/07—debbie ੭

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
Power button and VOL control knob
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,
then press the PWR (power) button. If you listen
to the radio with the engine not running, turn the
key to the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD)
that was playing immediately before the system
was turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR button again turns the system
off.
Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase
volume or to the left to decrease volume.
MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-
ANCE and CLOCK):
Press the MENU button to change the mode as
WHA1075 follows:
1. PRESET A·B·C button 7. TUNE buttons BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio
2. CD eject button 8. RPT button → BAS
3. MENU button 9. PWR/VOL control knob
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
4. CD insert slot 10. RDM button
the MENU button until the desired mode appears
5. CD button 11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons in the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust
6. FM·AM button 12. SEEK buttons Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

10/01/07—debbie ੭

use the SEEK button to adjust Fader and Balance ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the ● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode. in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts before the reset will advance by one hour
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until and the minutes will be reset to :00.
the sound between the right and left speakers.
CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the button until CLK ON appears. For example, if the MENU button and the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the time
2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- start flashing.
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed
reappear after about 10 seconds. 3. Press the SEEK button or to while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the
adjust the hour. display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the
NOTE: display will return to the audio.
4. Press the MENU button again; the display
If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU will switch to the minute adjustment mode. FM/AM radio operation
button will change the mode as follows: 5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK FM·AM button:
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → button or to adjust the minutes.
Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment → Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→
Audio → BAS 6. Press the MENU button again to exit the FM reception.
clock set mode.
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
For more information on setting the clock, see
The display will return to the regular clock display FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
“Clock set” later in this section.
after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
Clock operation again to return to the regular clock display. from stereo to monaural reception.
Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis- Resetting the time TUNE buttons:
played; use the SEEK button to turn the clock Hold the MENU button down and then press the
display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF). TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol- Manual tuning
Clock set lows: Press the TUNE or button for less
● If the displayed minutes before the reset are than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed To move quickly through the channels, press and
before the reset will stay the same and the hold either TUNE or button down
select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-
minutes will be reset to :00. for more than 1.5 seconds.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

SEEK buttons: 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- SEEK buttons:
ner.
SEEK tuning When is pressed while the compact disc
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
is playing, the next track following the present
Press the SEEK or button to seek opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
one starts to play from the beginning.
through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins case, reset the desired stations. Press several times to skip several tracks.
from low to high frequencies, or high to low Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
frequencies, depending on which button is
Compact disc (CD) player operation
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta- Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, pears in the display window. (When the last track
tion. Once the highest broadcasting station is and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at with the label side up. The compact disc is auto- played.)
the lowest broadcasting station. matically pulled into the slot and starts to play. When is pressed, the track being played
Station memory operations: If the radio is already operating, it automatically returns to the beginning. Press several
turns off and the compact disc begins to play. times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.
the A, B and C preset button in any combination CD button:
of AM or FM stations. SEEK (Scan CDs) button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns Press and hold the SEEK button for more
between storage banks. The radio displays off and the last used compact disc starts to play. than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of seconds of a track on the compact disc. The
presets are active. TUNE (rewind and fast SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.
forward) buttons:
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
When the TUNE or button is all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the or button is pressed during the scan
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) mode.
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes compact disc plays at an increased speed while
when the select button is pressed.) rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
3. The channel indicator will then come on and speed.
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

RPT button: CD EJECT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be When the button is pressed with a com-
changed as follows: pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
1 ←→ Normal
When the button is pressed while the
1: The track that is currently playing will be re- compact disc is being played, the compact disc
peated. will eject and the system will turn off.
RDM button: CD IN indicator:
When the RDM button is pressed while the com- CD IN indicator appears on the display when the
pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be CD is loaded with the system on.
changed as follows:
RDM ←→ Normal
RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-
ing will be played randomly.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0944
1. RADIO AM·FM button* 7. REAR CTRL button 13. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons
2. PRESET A·B·C button 8. SCAN button 14. CD eject button
3. RPT button 9. TRACK button 15. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
4. speaker control button 10. SEEK/CAT button 16. DISC·AUX button
5. RDM button 11. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob
6. PAUSE·MUTE button 12. CD load button

10/01/07—debbie ੭

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
pressed, the satellite radio mode will be volume.
skipped unless an optional satellite re- This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
ceiver and antenna are installed and an for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
XMா satellite radio service subscription ing speed changes.
is active. Satellite radio is not available AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. ance):
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if follows:
so equipped) Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera- To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
tion precautions” earlier in this section. the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears
LHA0927
in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub- To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. using the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-
the sound between the right and left speakers.
TER button; the audio settings screen will be
Audio main operation Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the displayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key, then
VOL/ON·OFF control: desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly press the ENTER button to change the SSV.
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then wise, the radio or CD display will automatically While in this screen you can also adjust the other
push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob while the reappear after about 10 seconds. audio settings by selecting the corresponding
system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) key.
which was playing immediately before the system
was turned off. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

While in this screen, you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.
For information on how to use the NISSAN con-
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”
earlier in this section.
Clock set
For setting the clock, see “Clock” earlier in this
section.

WHA0941 WHA0928
For information on how to use the NISSAN con- Precision phased audio (if so equipped):
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”
earlier in this section. To turn on or off the precision phased audio,
press the SETTING button. Select the “Audio”
key using the NISSAN controller, then press the
ENTER button, the audio settings screen will be
displayed. Select the “Precision Phased Audio”
key, then press the ENTER button. If the amber
indicator light is displayed, the precision phased
audio is enabled. Pressing the ENTER button
again will turn off the precision phased audio, the
indicator light will disappear.
When this item is turned on, super high pitch
sound and super low pitch sound are empha-
sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

PAUSE·MUTE button:
To mute or pause the audio sound, press the
PAUSE·MUTE button.
Press the PAUSE·MUTE button again to resume
the audio sound.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM/SAT band select:
Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change
the band as follows:
AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)
WHA0946 WHA0947 When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while
CD/MP3 display mode ● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
song name. the radio will come on at the station last played.
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD
certain text might be able to be displayed (when ● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the The last station played will also come on when
CD encoded with text is being used). album name. the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is ● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the *When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the
encoded the following text might be able to be artist’s name. satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
displayed by selecting the “Text” key using the optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but- stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
rently playing.
ton: scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
● Track displays the name of the song on the in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
● Folder displays the name of the current CD currently playing.
folder being accessed. If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
Some of this text or modes might not display AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will
● File displays the name of the file currently while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK automatically be turned off and the last radio
playing. button to exit the CD text display screen. station played will come on.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during 1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the ● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast PRESET A·B·C select button. sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station ● Artist and song information.
from stereo to monaural reception.
band.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:
3. Tune to the desired station using manual, RDS icon is displayed.
To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
knob to the right or left. of the desired station memory buttons (1 – Compact disc (CD) changer operation
6) until a beep sound is heard. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
tuning buttons: 4. The channel indicator will then come on and and press the button, then press one of
the sound will resume. Programming is now the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the compact disc
Press the SEEK/CAT button or the complete. into the slot with the label side facing up. The
TRACK button for less than 1.5 seconds
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- compact disc will be guided automatically into
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station. ner. the slot and start playing.

SCAN tuning: If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad- case, reset the desired stations.
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the If the system has been turned off while the com-
SCAN button again during this 5 second period Radio data system (RDS): pact disc was playing, pressing the
will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data disc.
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
information service transmitted by some radio
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to button:
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
the next station.
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera- many stations are now considering broadcasting To insert a CD in the CD changer, press
tions): RDS data. the button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-
lect the loading slot by pressing the CD insert
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT RDS can display:
select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press and
SAT stations. ● Station name, such as “The Groove”. hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- RPT button:
display when CDs are loaded into the changer. lect tracks when a CD is being played.
When the RPT button is pressed while the com-
DISC·AUX button: SEEK/CAT and TRACK pact disc is played, the play pattern can be
(Rewind·Fast Forward) changed as follows:
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
buttons: CD:
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRK RPT →
to play. button or the TRACK (fast forward) button ALL DISC RPT
while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the MP3/WMA CD:
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the
the button is released, the compact disc will ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER
radio will automatically be turned off and the
return to normal play speed. RPT → 1 TRK RPT → ALL DISC RPT
compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with the system ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
buttons: be repeated.
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed 1 TRK RPT: The track that is currently playing will
When the CD button is pressed with the com- be repeated
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play- 1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently being
played returns to its beginning. Press several
ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned accessed will be repeated.
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
off and the compact disc will start to play.
disc will go back the number of times the button RDM button:
is pressed. TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob
When the RDM button is pressed while the com-
When the TRACK button is pressed while While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the pact disc is played, the play pattern can be
the compact disc is playing, the next track will TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or changed as follows:
start to play from its beginning. Press several backward through available folders.
CD:
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc
CD select buttons: ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → ALL DISC MIX
will advance the number of times the button is
pressed. (When the last track on the compact To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
disc is skipped through, the first track will be CD select button (1 – 6).
played.)

10/01/07—debbie ੭

MP3/WMA CD: Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap- All discs:
proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-
ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → 1 FOLDER MIX ● Press and hold the button for more
play screen. Rear Display ON will display. Press
→ ALL DISC MIX than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
and hold the REAR CTRL button again will turn
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
ALL DISC MIX: All discs loaded will be played in the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF will
within 15 seconds, or the button is
a mixed order. display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear
pressed again during the eject sequence,
1 DISC MIX: The tracks on the disc that is cur- display screen, the display will show “Rear Con-
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
rently playing will be played in a mixed order. trols Not Available”.
celed.
1 FOLDER MIX: The tracks in the folder that is
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:
currently being accessed will be played in a When this button is pressed while the compact
mixed order. disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
Press the button to turn the rear speakers and the last source will be played.
SCAN button: off and the headphones on. Press this button
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the CD IN indicator:
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button
to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on headphones off. The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again CD EJECT: have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
during this 10 second period stops the scan and only.
the CD remains on that track. Current/Selected disc:
REAR CTRL: ● Press the button, then press the slot
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN- compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-
LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
button again to turn the rear seat audio controller disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc
off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio will reload.
controller, the display will show “Rear Controls
Not Available”.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA1017
AUX jack
The AUX jack ᭺ is located below the air condi-
1
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts
any standard analog audio input, such as from a
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or a
laptop computer.
Press the DISC·AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WHA0945
1. PRESET A·B·C button 7. SEEK/CAT button 13. AM·FM/SAT button*
2. DISC/AUX button 8. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob 14. MUSIC BOX button
3. speaker control button 9. CompactFlash insert slot
4. REAR CTRL button 10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
5. SCAN·RPT button 11. CD eject button
6. TRACK button 12. VOL/ON·OFF control knob

10/01/07—debbie ੭

*When the AM·FM/SAT button is Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
pressed, the satellite radio mode will be volume.
skipped unless an optional satellite re- This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
ceiver and antenna are installed and an for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
XMா satellite radio service subscription ing speed changes.
is active. Satellite radio is not available AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. ance):
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so follows:
equipped) Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera- To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
tion precautions” earlier in this section. the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears
LHA0884
in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also
use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance To change the SSV mode from OFF (0) to 5,
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts dio” key, the audio settings screen will be dis-
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
the sound between the right and left speakers. played. Touch the “–” key or “+” key, to change
Audio main operation Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the the SSV.
VOL/ON·OFF control: desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly While in this screen you can also adjust the other
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- audio settings by touching the corresponding
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob while the key.
reappear after about 10 seconds.
system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
which was playing immediately before the system desired level, touch the “BACK” key.
was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

While in this screen, you can also adjust the other
audio settings by touching the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, touch the “BACK” key.
Clock set
For setting the clock, see “Clock” earlier in this
section.

LHA0900 WHA0942
Precision phased audio (if so equipped):
To turn on or off the precision phased audio,
press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-
dio” key; the audio settings screen will be dis-
played. Touch the “Precision Phased Audio ON”
key. If the amber indicator light is displayed, the
precision phased audio is enabled. Touching the
“Precision Phased Audio ON” key again will turn
off the precision phased audio; the indicator light
will disappear.
When this item is turned on, super high pitch
sound and super low pitch sound are empha-
sized and midrange sound is played naturally.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM/SAT band select:
Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change
the band as follows:
AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)
When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the
WHA0949 WHA0950 satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
CD/MP3 display mode ● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
album name. stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
certain text might be able to be displayed (when ● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
CD encoded with text is being used). artist’s name.
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is ● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur- AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will
encoded the following text might be able to be rently playing. automatically be turned off and the last radio
displayed by touching the “Text” key: station played will come on.
● Track displays the name of the song on the
● Folder displays the name of the current CD currently playing. The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
folder being accessed. FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
Some of this text or modes might not display signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
● File displays the name of the file currently while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK from stereo to monaural reception.
playing. button to exit the CD text display screen.
● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob: 2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station ● Artist and song information.
band.
To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
knob to the right or left. 3. Tune to the desired station using manual, RDS icon is displayed.
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
of the desired station memory buttons (1 – Compact disc (CD) player operation
tuning buttons: 6) until a beep sound is heard. Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
Press the SEEK/CAT button or the 4. The channel indicator will then come on and and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
TRACK button for less than 1.5 seconds the sound will resume. Programming is now label side facing up. The compact disc will be
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen- complete. guided automatically into the slot and start play-
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station. ing.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
SCAN·RPT (SCAN tuning) button: ner. If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
Press the SCAN·RPT button to initiate scan tun- If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
ing. Scan tuning will stop at each broadcasting opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that If the system has been turned off while the com-
station for 5 seconds. Press the SCAN·RPT but- case, reset the desired stations. pact disc was playing, pressing the
ton again during this 5 second period to stop VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
Radio data system (RDS):
scan tuning; the radio will remain tuned to that disc.
station. If the SCAN·RPT button is not pressed RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next information service transmitted by some radio DISC/AUX button:
station. stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera- system off and the compact disc loaded, the
many stations are now considering broadcasting
tions): system will turn on and the compact disc will start
RDS data.
to play.
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT RDS can display:
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
SAT stations. ● Station name, such as “The Groove”. radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the ● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
PRESET A·B·C select button. sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

SEEK/CAT and TRACK When the CD button is pressed with the system 1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly.
buttons: off and the compact disc loaded the system will 1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-
turn on and the compact disc will start to play. cessed will be repeated.
When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed
When the CD button is pressed with the com- 1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play- being accessed will be played randomly.
played returns to its beginning. Press several
times to skip back through tracks. The compact ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned REAR CTRL:
disc will go back the number of times the button off and the compact disc will start to play.
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear
is pressed. TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-
When the TRACK button is pressed while While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL
the compact disc is playing, the next track will TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or button again will turn the rear seat audio control-
start to play from its beginning. Press several backward through available folders. ler off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio
SCAN·RPT (random and repeat) button:
will advance the number of times the button is controller, the display will show “Rear Controls
pressed. (When the last track on the compact When the SCAN·RPT button is pressed while the Not Available”.
disc is skipped through, the first track will be compact disc is being played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows: Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-
played.)
proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- CD: play screen on. Rear Display ON will display.
lect tracks when a CD is being played. 1 DISC RPT → 1 TRK RPT → 1 DISC RDM → 1 Press and hold the REAR CTRL button again will
DISC RPT turn the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
will display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a
(Rewind·Fast Forward) MP3/WMA CD: rear display screen, the display will show “Rear
buttons:
1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT → Controls Not Available”.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) 1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → 1 DISC RPT
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button
1 DISC RPT: the entire disc will be repeated.
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc 1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be Press the button to turn the rear speakers
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When repeated. off and the headphones on. Press this button
the button is released, the compact disc will
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the
return to normal play speed. headphones off.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
When button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.

LHA1017 LHA1018
AUX jack COMPACTFLASH™ (CF) PLAYER
The AUX jack ᭺ is located below the air condi-
1 OPERATION (if so equipped)
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts
any standard analog audio input, such as from a Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi-
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or a tion, and insert a CF card ᭺ into the Compact-
1
laptop computer. Flash™ player slot ᭺. Then press the DISC/AUX
2
button repeatedly to switch to the Compact-
Press the DISC/AUX button to play a compatible Flash™ mode.
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.
If the system has been turned off while the Com-
pactFlash™ card was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the Com-
pactFlash™ card.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

DISC/AUX button:
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the CF card inserted, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
a CF card is inserted, press the DISC/AUX but-
ton repeatedly until the center display changes to
the CompactFlash™ mode.

WHA0953 WHA0954

CF display mode ● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
While listening to CF certain text might be able to
be displayed. ● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Depending on how the files are encoded on the
Press the BACK button to exit the CF text display
CF the following text might be able to be dis-
screen.
played by touching the “Text” key:
● Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
● File displays the name of the file currently
playing.
● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons: SCAN·RPT button: Troubleshooting messages:
Press the SEEK/CAT button or the Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while the CF The following messages will be displayed under
TRACK button while the CF card is being played, card is playing, the play pattern can be changed certain conditions:
the next track or the beginning of the current track as follows:
● Reading CompactFlash™
on the CF will be played. 1 CF CARD RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK The system is reading the CF card inserted
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) RPT → 1 CF CARD RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → in the slot.
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button 1 CF CARD RPT
● No CompactFlash™ card
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds, the CF 1 CF CARD RPT: the entire CF card will be A CF card is not inserted in the slot.
card will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. repeated.
When the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or ● CompactFlash™ read error
1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-
The system cannot read the CF card.
the TRACK (fast forward) button is re- cessed will be repeated.
leased, the CF card will return to the normal 1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be ● Unplayable file
playing speed. repeated. The system cannot play a music file.
1 CF CARD RDM: all the tracks on the CF card
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- will be played randomly. ● No audio file
lect tracks when the CF card is being played. 1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder
being accessed will be played randomly. does not contain any music files.
For more information on how to use the NISSAN
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control- Compatibility with other media:
CF eject:
ler” earlier in this section. If a commercially available CompactFlash™
Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CF adapter is inserted into the slot, other memory
Folder selection: card is inserted, the CF card will be ejected. media can also be used.
To change to another folder in the CF card either:
● Turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left.
● Touch the desired folder key on screen.
● Use the NISSAN controller.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MUSIC BOX HARD-DISK DRIVE
AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Music Box hard-disk drive audio system can
store songs from CDs being played. The system
has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and
can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900
songs).
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box hard-disk drive audio system:
● CDs without MP3/WMA files.
● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.
WHA0955 WHA0956
● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-
fication in CD-Extras. Recording songs If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the CD,
● First session of multisession disc. 1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. the title is automatically displayed on the screen.
For information on playing CDs, see “Com- For title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, mu-
Extreme temperature conditions [below Ϫ4°F pact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in
(Ϫ20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect sic recognition technology and related data are
this section.
the performance of the hard disk. provided by Gracenoteா.
2. Touch the “REC” key.
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”
NOTE: The system starts recording the track being key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller
If the hard disk needs to be replaced due to played and REC CD appears on the screen. and press the ENTER button. The track name and
a malfunction, all stored music data will be album title are displayed on the screen.
erased.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the symbol is displayed
behind the track number.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

The Music Box audio system cannot perform Stopping playback:
recording under the following conditions:
The system stops playing when:
● There is not enough space in the hard disk.
● Another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash™
● The number of albums reaches the maximum or AUX) is selected.
of 500.
● The audio system is turned off.
● The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000. ● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
Automatic recording:
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For Press the SEEK/CAT button or the
more information, see “Music Box settings” later TRACK button while a track is being played; the
in this section. next track or the beginning of the current track will
WHA0957
Stopping recording: be played.
Playing recorded songs
To stop the recording, touch the “STOP” key on Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)
the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio system Select the Music Box audio system by using one button or the TRACK (fast forward) button
is turned off or the ignition switch is turned to the of the following methods: for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the
OFF position, the recording also stops. track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.
● Press the mode select switch on the steer-
When the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or
ing wheel.
the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
leased, the track will return to the normal playing
for audio control” later in this section.
speed.
● Press the MUSIC BOX button.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
● Give voice commands. lect tracks.
For information, see “NISSAN voice recog-
For more information on how to use the NISSAN
nition system” later in this section.
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-
ler” earlier in this section.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SCAN·RPT button:
Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while a track is
playing, the play pattern can be changed as fol-
lows:
ALL Playlist RPT → 1 Playlist RPT → 1 TRK RPT
→ ALL Playlist RDM → 1 Playlist RDM → ALL
Playlist RPT
ALL Playlist RPT: the entire playlist will be re-
peated.
1 Playlist RPT: the playlist currently being played
will be repeated.
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be
repeated.
LHA0958 LHA0959
ALL Playlist RDM: all the tracks in the playlist will
be played randomly. Music Box menu ● Play by Date
1 Playlist RDM: the tracks in the current playlist Plays tracks in each album. The albums are
There are some options available during play-
will be played randomly. sorted in order of the date when they were
back. Touch the “Menu” key, then select one of
stored in the system.
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for ● Play by Mood
each item: Plays music from one of the following
moods:
● Play by Artist
Plays songs by an artist whose music is – Relaxing Music
currently being played. The artists are sorted
– Lively Music
in alphabetical order.
– Slow Music
● Play by Album
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are – Upbeat Music
sorted in alphabetical order.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Play by Category ● Search Song Details
Plays music from one of the following cat- Set the conditions and touch the “Start
egories: Song Search” key to search for a desired
– My Favorites song that is stored in the system. The con-
ditions are as follows:
– Hit Songs
– Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)
– Kids’ Songs
– Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s, ’10s
– Rarely Played and After)
● Search Artists – Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order. Group and Duo)
Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks
by the artist and starts playing the first track. – Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,
Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,
LHA0960 Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listen-
● Search Albums ing, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Re-
Displays a list of albums in order of the date ligious, World, Classical, Children’s and
when they were stored in the system. Se- Other)
lecting an album displays all of the tracks on ● Search Keywords
the album and starts playing the first track. Input a search keyword using the keypad
Touch the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in one displayed on the screen.
of the following order: For information, see “How to use the touch
– Rec. (Recorded) Date screen” earlier in this section.
– Name ● Edit Albums
Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,
– Release Year Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit
– Artist the details using the keypad displayed on
the screen.
For information, see “How to use the touch
screen” earlier in this section.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Music Box System Info. ● Transfer Missing Titles to CF
Displays the following information about the Transfers the information of the album
Music Box audio system: recorded without titles to a Compact-
Flash™ card.
– Music Box Used / Free Space
Information about Saved Album, Saved – Music Box Settings
Track and Remaining Time is displayed. For information, see “Music Box settings”
– Mood Categories
Number of saved tracks and their catego- – CDDB Version
ries Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow The version of the built-in Gracenoteா
Music, Upbeat Music and Others are dis- Database is displayed.
played.
– Deleted Items
Information about the deleted tracks is
LHA0961
displayed.
Music Box text display:
– Search Missing Titles
If titles are not displayed for CDs that While listening to a track in the Music Box audio
have been recorded, titles can be ac- system you can view certain text. Touch the “Text”
quired using one of the following meth- key to display the following information for each
ods: item:
● Retrieve from HDD ● Set Mood
Searches the title using the database in Set the mood category of the track to “Re-
the hard-disk. laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”
or “Upbeat Music”.
● Retrieve from CF
Searches the title from the information ● Delete Track
acquired on the Internet. Delete the track being played.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Edit Info.
Edit the name of the track being played and
its artist using the keypad displayed on the
screen.
For information, see “How to use the touch
screen” earlier in this section.
The category of the track can also be set to
Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,
Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,
Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,
Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,
Classical, Children’s and Others.
● Remove Track
Reset the mood setting of a track.
LHA0962 LHA0964
Restoring deleted data You can also listen to the beginning of each track
that has been deleted by performing the follow-
Deleted music data can be restored by performing:
ing the following:
1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the “Music
1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the touch the Box System Info.” key on the screen.
“Music Box System Info.” key on the screen.
2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the
2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the “Play Sample” key.
“Album/Track” key.
3. Touch the “Restore Album/Track” key to re-
store the deleted music data.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0965 LHA0962 LHA0963

Music Box settings ● Title Text Priority:
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc
To set up the Music Box hard-disk drive audio Data Base) to acquire track information from
system to your preferred settings, touch the the Gracenoteா Database or set to CD
“Menu” key during playback, then touch the “Mu- TEXT to acquire the information from CDs.
sic Box System Info.” key, and then the “Music
● Delete ALL Music Box Data:
Box Settings” key.
Delete all music data stored on the hard disk.
● Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box hard-disk audio system automatically
starts recording when a CD is inserted.
● Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Gracenoteா your own personal non-commercial use only. You The Gracenote Software and each item of
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
NOTE: Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
● The information contained in the
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Gracenoteா Database is not fully guaran-
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
teed.
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT- data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
● The service of the Gracenoteா Database on TED HEREIN. data categories for any cause that Gracenote
the Internet may be stopped without prior deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
notice for maintenance. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio- error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-
late these restrictions. If your license terminates, ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
End-User License Agreement Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
you agree to cease any and all use of the
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP- Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and new enhanced or additional data types or cat-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW. Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights egories that Gracenote may provide in the future
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and and is free to discontinue its online services at
Gracenoteா MusicID™ Terms of Use
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership any time.
This device contains software from Gracenote, rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The become liable for any payment to you for any
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft- information that you provide. You agree that
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
ware”) enables this application to do online disc Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
identification and obtain music-related informa- Agreement against you directly in its own name.
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser- ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
means of the intended End-User functions of this
vice to count queries without knowing anything WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
device.
about who you are. For more information, see the CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for the Gracenote MusicID Service. REVENUES.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Copyright: ● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenoteா. Gracenote is the ● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
industry standard in music recognition technol- outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor- rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
mation visit www.gracenote.com. side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2006 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2006 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend- LHA0049
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. CD/CF (CompactFlash™) CARE AND
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks CLEANING
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
CD:
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-
marks of Gracenote. ● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Do not store the cards in highly humid loca-
tions.
● Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.
● Do not spill any liquids on the cards.
Refer to the CompactFlash™ card Owner’s
Manual for more details.

LHA1002 WHA0611
CF cards: Type A
1. Volume control switch
CAUTION 2. MODE select switch
Do not force the CompactFlash™ card into 3. POWER on/off switch
the CompactFlash™ player slot. Forcing 4. Tuning switch
the CF card could damage the pins inside
the CF player slot, especially if the CF card
is upside down or backwards.
● Never touch the terminal portion of the Com-
pactFlash™ cards. Do not bend the cards.
● Always place the cards in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● Do not place heavy objects on the cards.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR Volume control switch
AUDIO CONTROL Push the volume control switch up or down to
The audio system can be operated using the increase or decrease the volume.
controls on the steering wheel.
Tuning
POWER on/off switch
Memory change (radio):
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON
position, push the POWER switch to turn the While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
audio system on or off. B or C), push the tuning switch or
for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next
If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition key preset station in memory.
turned to the ACC or ON position, push the
MODE switch to turn the audio system on. Seek tuning (radio):
WHA0612
MODE select switch Push the tuning switch or for more
Type B
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
1. Volume control switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode radio station.
2. Phone operation switch in the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-
3. POWER on and MODE select switch SET B → PRESET C → Music Box** (if so Next/Previous track (CD/CF):
4. Tuning switch equipped) → CD* → CompactFlash™* (if so Push the tuning switch or for less
equipped) → DVD* (if so equipped) → AUX***. than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
*These modes are only available when compat- present track or skip to the next track. Push
ible media storage is inserted into the device. several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

**This mode is only available when music has This system searches for the blank intervals be-
been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk tween selections. If there is a blank interval within
drive audio system. 1 program or there is no interval between pro-
grams, the system may not stop in the desired or
***This mode is only available when a compatible expected location.
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Next/Previous track (Music Box): Press the button on the front radio control
panel; the headphones symbol and the message
Push the tuning switch or for less
“Headphones ON” illuminates on the front dis-
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
play when the headphones are on.
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks. One or two infrared headphones and one remote
controller are included if the vehicle is equipped
Push and hold the tuning switch or
with the DVD entertainment system.
for more than 1.5 seconds to change playlists.
When the last playlist is playing, the next playlist For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radio
will be selected. with compact disc player, if the rear headphones
are turned on, the rear speakers will be disabled.
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):
The rear passengers can use the wireless head-
Push the tuning switch or for more phones to listen to a different media than the front
than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up passengers. The rear passengers can listen to
or down. LHA1062 the same media along with the front passengers
or they can listen to a different media.
1. Infrared transmitter lens*
2. Rear display screen For more information on the remote controller,
*Red transmitters will be visible when infra- see “NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System
red headphones are on. (MES)” later in this section.
REMOTE AUDIO SYSTEM VOL (volume) wireless headphones
CONTROLS (if so equipped) dial:
Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio The VOL dial on the wireless headphones allows
control panel to allow the remote controller to the rear passengers to adjust the headphone
control some audio system functions. Press the volume level.
REAR CTRL button again to allow the audio
system to be controlled by only the front controls.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Speaker control (front panel) Seek (remote control) ANTENNA
button: buttons: Window antenna
Press the button on the front radio control In AM or FM mode, the or the seek The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
panel to turn the rear speakers off and the wire- buttons on the remote controller allow the rear passenger and driver side windows.
less headphones on. Press the button seat passengers to find the next or previous
again to turn rear speakers back on and wireless preset radio station.
CAUTION
headphones off.
In CD, Music Box hard-disk drive audio system
● Do not place metalized film near the
MODE (remote control) button: and CompactFlash™ mode, the or
rear driver or passenger side window
the seek buttons allow the rear passen-
The MODE button on the remote controller al- glass or attach any metal parts to it. This
gers to find the next or previous selection.
lows the rear passengers to change between may cause poor reception or noise.
Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, Music Box**, CD*, REW and FF ● When cleaning the inside of the rear
CompactFlash*, DVD* and AUX. When a source (remote control) but- driver or passenger side window, be
of media is selected, the media type will be dis- tons: careful not to scratch or damage the
played on the rear screen. When the (rewind) or the (fast for- window antenna. Lightly wipe along the
*These modes are only available when compat- ward) button on the remote controller is pressed antenna with a dampened soft cloth.
ible media storage is inserted into the device. while in AM or FM mode, the radio will tune to the
next frequency.
**This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk When the (rewind) or the (fast for-
drive audio system. ward) button on the remote controller is pressed
while in CD, Music Box hard-disk audio system,
or CompactFlash™, the media will play while re-
winding or fast forwarding.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
WARNING
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
● The driver must not attempt to operate above 158°F (70°C)].
or view the Mobile Entertainment Sys-
tem while the vehicle is in motion so To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do not
that full attention may be given to ve- operate the system more than 15 minutes without
hicle operation. starting the engine.

● Do not attempt to modify the system to Movies will not be shown on the front display
display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie
so may distract the driver and may is played. To view movies in the front display, stop
cause a collision and serious personal the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift
injury or death. selector lever to the P (Park) position and apply
the parking brake.
LHA1019
CAUTION
This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter-
tainment system, which enables you to play a ● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the im- display may break if hit with a hard or
ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis- sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
play screens. touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning
the Mobile Entertainment System com-
ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-
ing solutions.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
CONTROLS
1. EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with the
DVD loaded, it will be ejected.
The display will show the eject symbol in the
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds
once the button is pressed.
If the DVD is not loaded, the display will
show “NO DISC”.
If the DVD comes out and is not removed
within 25 seconds, it will be pulled back into
the slot to protect it.
WHA0967 2. DVD slot:
1. EJECT button Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side
2. DVD slot facing up. The DVD will be guided automati-
3. Auxiliary input jack cally into the slot.
3. Auxiliary input jack:
For information, see “DVD auxiliary input
jacks” later in this section.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

6. DISPLAY button
7. MODE button
8. SUBTITLE button
9. AUDIO button
10. ANGLE button
11. CLEAR button
12. PAUSE button
13. PLAY button
14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
button
15. MENU button
16. NAVIGATION keys
17. BACK button
LHA0315
18. NUMERIC KEYPAD
REMOTE CONTROL FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
Refer to “Remote control operation” later in this The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-
section for the function of each button. trol receiver ᭺ located at the bottom of the
1
screen.

CAUTION
LHA0317 ● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
1. POWER button sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
2. STOP button touch the liquid crystalline material,
3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI- which contains a small amount of mer-
OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
4. TITLE button immediately with soap and water.
5. ENTER button

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● The screen rotates down to view and up
into the housing to store when not in
use. Ensure that the screen is latched
securely into the housing when stored.

SAA0720 SAA0721

Headphones NOTE:

Power ON/OFF: For optimum infrared headphone perfor-
mance, increase the volume on the rear
Press the power button to turn the headphones seat controller to the maximum level and
on or off. adjust the infrared headphone volume us-
ing the volume control on the headphones.
Volume control:
Using a lower volume setting on the rear
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol- seat controller can cause static noise in the
ume. infrared headphones.
The headphones will automatically be turned off
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
period. To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, keep the power supply turned off when
not in use.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD Copyright and trademark Disc selection
MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ● The technology protected by the U.S. patent You can play the following disc formats with the
Precautions and other intellectual property rights owned DVD drive:
by Macrovision Corporation and other right ● DVD-VIDEO
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain- holders is adopted for this system.
ment system. ● VIDEO-CD
● This copyright protected technology cannot
be used without a permit from Macrovision ● CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD
WARNING
Corporation. It is limited to be personal use, with MP3/WMA cannot be played.)
The driver must not attempt to operate the etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision
DVD System or wear the headphones Use DVDs with a region code 1, ALL or 1 in-
Corporation is not issued. cluded for your DVD entertainment system. The
while the vehicle is in motion so that full
attention may be given to vehicle region code is displayed as a small symbol
● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
operation. printed on the top of the DVD. This vehicle-
● Dolby digital is manufactured under license installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a
from Dolby Laboratories, Inc. region code other than 1 or ALL.
CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle ● Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks
engine is running. Operating the DVD of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
for extended periods of time with the ● DTS and DTS Digital Surround are regis-
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,
battery. Inc.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq- Parental level (parental control)
uids may cause the system to DVDs with the parental control setting can be
malfunction. played with this system. Please use your own
While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD player judgement to set the parental control with the
does not guarantee complete functionality of all system.
VIDEO-CD formats.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Rear display:
To adjust the rear display mode, press the DISP
(Display) button on the remote controller.
To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and
contrast, select each key using the joystick on the
remote controller and tilt the joystick to right or
left.
Press the BACK button to apply the settings and
return to the previous display

WHA0968 LHA0972
Display settings PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE
Front display: DISC (DVD)
To adjust the front display mode, press the SET- With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,
TING button while the DVD is being played, video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-
select the “Display” key with the NISSAN control- gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-
ler, and then press the ENTER button. To adjust pendently of the front seat.
the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color, con- Press the DISC/AUX button located on the front
trast and black level select each key using the controls to hear the sound of the DVD play
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button. through the speakers.
Then you can adjust each item using the NISSAN
controller. After changes have been made press Press the REAR CTRL button located on the
the BACK button to save the settings. front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio
controls. For more information on rear seat audio
controls see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in this
section.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Pressing the button on the front controls DVD operation keys To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to
turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or press the button on the keypad of the
disables the wireless headphones . To operate the DVD drive, touch the preferred key remote controller.
(if so equipped) or select the preferred key dis-
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote played on the operation screen using the STOP key:
control. NISSAN controller.
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables Touch the “ ” STOP key to stop playing the
are necessary. You can use them in almost all the NOTE: DVD.
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use If the display in your vehicle is not touch To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to
the headphones in the front seat.) screen enabled; use the NISSAN controller press the button on the keypad of the
and the ENTER button to operate the fol- remote controller.
DISC/AUX button lowing functions. For more information on
SKIP (forward) key:
Park the vehicle in a safe location and how to operate the NISSAN controller, see
apply the parking brake for the front seat “How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier
in this section. Touch the “ ” SKIP key to skip the chapter(
occupants to operate the DVD drive while
s) of the disc forward. The chapters will advance
watching the images. PAUSE key: the number of times the “ ” SKIP key is
Press the DISC/AUX button on the instrument touched.
panel and turn the display to the DVD mode. Touch the “ ” PAUSE key to pause the DVD.
Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for more
To resume playing the DVD, touch the
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto- than 1.5 seconds to fast forward the disc. When
“ ”PLAY key.
matically. the “ ” SKIP key is released the disc will be
To pause the DVD, it is also possible to press played normally.
The operation screen will be turned on when the
the button on the keypad of the remote
DISC/AUX button located on the instrument To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible
controller.
panel is pressed while a DVD is being played, to press the button on the keypad of the
and it will turn off automatically after a period of PLAY key: remote controller.
time. To turn it on again, press the DISC/AUX
button once more. Touch the “ ” PLAY key to start playing the
DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SKIP (rewind) key:

Touch the “ ” SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc backward. The chapters will go back
the number of times the “ ” SKIP key is
touched.
Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for more
than 1.5 seconds to rewind the disc. When the
“ ” SKIP key is released the disc will be
played normally.
To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also pos-
sible to press the button on the keypad of
the remote controller.
LHA0969 LHA0970

DVD settings Menu:

Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following Some menus specific to each DVD will be
settings while playing a DVD. shown. For details, see the instructions attached
to the DVD.
When all the changes have been made, press
BACK button to save all the settings. Top Menu:

Switch to DVD-AUX: Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For
details, see the instructions attached to the DVD.
Switch the output source from the DVD drive to
another device connected to the auxiliary input Audio:
jacks located on the DVD player. Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will be
For more information, see “DVD auxiliary input shown. For details, see the instructions attached
jacks” later in this section. to the DVD.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Angle Mark: DRC:
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you
shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene to tune the dynamic range of the sound recorded
can be seen from a different angle. Touch the in the Dolbyா Digital format. Touch the “–” key or
“ON” key to enable the angle mark; the indicator the “+” key to tune the DRC.
light will illuminate. Auxiliary input jacks
10Key Search: The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front of
Touch the “10Key Search” key to open the num- the DVD player which is located inside the center
ber entry screen. Input the number you want to console. NTSC and PAL compatible devices
search for and touch the “OK” key. The specified such as video games, camcorders and portable
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played. video players can be connected to the auxiliary
jacks.
Title Search:
LHA0971 The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
Subtitle: The scene with the specified title will be dis- tion purposes.
played the number of times the “–” key or the “+”
Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by ● Yellow - video input
key is touched.
touching the “ ” key or the “ ” key. ● White - left channel audio input
Menu Skip:
Display Mode: ● Red - right channel audio input
DVD menus are automatically configured and the
Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or the Cin- contents will be played directly when the “Menu Before connecting a device to a jack, power off
ema mode by touching the “ ” key or the Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may the portable device and turn off the DVD player.
“ ” key. not be played directly even if this item is turned on.
To view something connected to the auxiliary
Angle: DVD Language: input jacks, press the DISC/AUX button until the
If the DVD contains different angles (such as DVD mode appears, then touch the “Settings”
Touch the “DVD Language” key to open the num-
moving images), the current image angle can be key. Then touch the “Switch to DVD-AUX” key.
ber entry screen. Input the number correspond-
switched to another one. The screen will change to the DVD-AUX mode.
ing to the preferred language and touch the “OK”
Choose a different angle by touching the “–” key key. The DVD top menu language will be
or the “+” key; the angle will change if available. changed to the one specified.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

PWR on/off button:
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ON
position, press the PWR button to turn the DVD
rear display on or off.

NOTE:
The PWR button on the remote control only
turns the rear display on or off.
Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically
into the slot.
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the
LHA0973 LHA0974
DVD player will automatically turn on.
DVD-AUX settings ● Display Mode:
Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cin- CAUTION
Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings: ema mode by touching the “ ” key or
the “ ” key. Do not force the compact disc into the
● Switch to DVD: slot. This could damage the player.
Touch this key to switch back to the DVD When all the changes have been made, press the
BACK button to save all the settings. MODE select button:
mode.
Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video
● Video Format: REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks
If the auxiliary source is in a different video
For all operation precautions, see “Before oper- on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,
format, touch the “ ” key or the “ ”
key, the video format will change. ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System” White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =
earlier in this section. Video input).
The DVD system can also be controlled by using The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left
the remote controller in the rear seats. See the corner of the display for 4 seconds once the
following items. Mode is changed to AUX.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input Press several times to skip back through pro- ● The display menu will remain on the screen
jacks” in this section. grams. The DVD will go back the number of times for 10 seconds if no subsequent control
the button is pressed. activations occur.
PLAY:
PAUSE: ● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within
When the PLAY button on the remote the display menu, and use ENTER to select
control is pressed, the player will play. When the PAUSE button on the remote the item.
control is pressed, the player will pause playing of NAVIGATION KEYS:
In play mode, the display will briefly show
the media. In pause mode, the player will
on the upper left corner of the display. If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-
show on the upper left corner of the dis-
FF (Fast Forward), REW: play until the player is changed to another mode. GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,
Down, Left, and Right within the menu.
STOP:
Press (fast forward) / (Rewind) but- If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION
tons to carry out the fast forward or rewind pre- KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,
Press the STOP button once to stop playing the
sentation at 5 times normal play speed. media. The display will show in the upper and Right within the menu.
Press (fast forward) / (Rewind) but- left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the
ENTER:
tons again or PLAY button to resume the normal last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY
play speed. button is pressed again, it will resume at the In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-
stored disc track and time position. lect MENU items.
NEXT CHAPTER/
PREVIOUS CHAPTER: If the STOP button is pressed again when the In the display menu, press the ENTER button to
player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize select items for modification, as per the on-
When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button is the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect it screen instructions.
pressed while the DVD is being played, the pro- will ignore the last stored disc position and upon
gram next to the present one will start to play from receipt of the next play message it will begin at MENU:
its beginning. Press several times to skip through the Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”. If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU
programs. The DVD will advance the number of DISPLAY: button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on
times the button is pressed. When the the screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigate
(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2
within the menu, and use ENTER to select the
program being played returns to its beginning. seconds, the display menu will appear on the
screen. item.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY CLEAR: CARE AND MAINTENANCE
mode.
Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
TITLE: inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment
3-second timer. System (DVD player face, screen, remote control,
Press TITLE button to return the DVD media to
the “title” of the DVD. NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10): etc.).

Press TITLE button again to return to the previous Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
stop point and play. disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
numeric value. above 158°F (70°C)].
BACK:
The “≥10” button input numbers greater than or Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme
Press the BACK button to exit the current active equal to 10, allowing up three digits to be input humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than
menu and return to the previous menu. for selecting chapter/title/track number. 75%).
SUBTITLE: The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will CAUTION
Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle continuously shift the previously input number to
selection menu. the “left”. ● Do not use any solvents or cleaning
solutions when cleaning the video
Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle The chapter/title/track number will be automati- system.
through each available subtitle. cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if
3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs. ● Do not use excessive force on the moni-
AUDIO: tor screen.
The operator can cancel the input
Press the AUDIO button to call up audio menu. chapter/title/track number by actuating the ● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the tor screen as it may become dirty or
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle
3-second timer. damaged.
through each available audio track.
ANGLE: These functions can be used only for the DVD
discs which correspond to them.
Press the ANGLE button to call up camera angle
menu.
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle
through each available angle.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● A new disc may be rough on its inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges using the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
● Never attempt to use a DVD that has
been cracked, deformed, or repaired
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment.
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-
nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly.
● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
LHA0049 side of the DVD.
HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD ● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.
CAUTION ● Always place discs in the storage case when
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch they are not being used.
the surface of the disc. ● Do not put on any sticker or write anything
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from on either surface of the DVD.
the center to the outer edge using a LHA0484
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion. DVD player operation precautions
● Do not use a conventional record Do not use the following DVDs as they may
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in- cause the DVD player to malfunction:
tended for industrial use.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● DVDs with a region code other than 5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your
“1”. The region code ᭺ is displayed in
A NISSAN dealer for further assistance.
a small symbol printed on the top of 6. Re-program the radio presets.
the DVD ᭺.B

● DVDs that are not round.
● DVDs with a paper label.
● DVDs that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges.
● Recordable digital video discs
(DVD+R).
● Rewritable digital video discs
(DVD+RW). LHA0318

If a DVD with a paper label is used and Remote control and headphones
becomes jammed, you may be able to reset battery replacement
the unit and eject the jammed disc with the
following procedure: Replace the battery as follows:

1. Record the radio presets. 1. Open the lid.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal from 2. Replace batteries with new ones.
the battery for five minutes. ● Size AA (remote control)
3. Reconnect the negative battery termi- ● Size AAA (headphones)
nal.
Make sure that the and ends on
4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has the batteries match the markings inside the
been ejected. If it has not, try to eject compartment.
the DVD by pushing the eject button.
3. Close the lid securely.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

● When changing batteries, do not let dust or When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
oil get on the remote control and head- your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
phones. precautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
FCC Notice:
other electronic parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli- WARNING
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
● A cellular telephone should not be used
erate the equipment. This device complies
while driving so full attention may be
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
the following two conditions: (1) This de-
phones while driving.
vice may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any inter- ● If you must make a call while your ve-
SAA0723 ference received, including interference hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
If the battery is removed for any reason that may cause undesired operation of the lar phone operational mode (if so
device. equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
other than replacement, close the lid se-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
curely.
full attention may be given to vehicle
● If you will not be using the remote control for operation.
long periods of time, remove the batteries. ● If a conversation in a moving vehicle
● Replacement of the batteries is needed requires you to take notes, pull off the
when the remote control only functions at road to a safe location and stop your
extremely close distances to the DVD player vehicle before doing so.
or not at all.
● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
● An improperly disposed battery can harm
the environment. Always confirm local regu-
lations for battery disposal.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(for U.S. – if so equipped)
CAUTION WARNING
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos- ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
sible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a
modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
be given to vehicle operation.
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the ● If you are unable to devote full attention
antenna wire next to any harness. to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
location and stop your vehicle.
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION
radio chassis to the body.
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. use a phone after starting the engine.
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so, will bypass the variable voltage con-
trol system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely. Refer to “Vari-
able voltage control system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion later in this manual.
● Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

module when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System (for U.S.)”
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
● Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
WHA0977 phone module. Please visit
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா make or receive a hands-free telephone call with www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap- your cellular phone in the vehicle. mended phone list and pairing.
proved Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you ● You will not be able to use a hands-free
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
can set up the wireless connection between your phone under the following conditions:
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone vice area.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” tions.
in a tunnel, in an underground parking later in this section. You can also visit – Operation is subject to the following two con-
garage, near a tall building or in a moun- www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- ditions:
tainous area. shooting help.
1. This device may not cause interference and
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Some cellular phones or other devices may
from being dialed. cause interference or a buzzing noise to 2. this device must accept any interference,
come from the audio system speakers. Stor- including interference that may cause un-
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal desired operation of the device.
ing the device in a different location may
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
reduce or eliminate the noise. IC Regulatory information
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call. ● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual – Operation is subject to the following two con-
regarding the telephone charges, cellular ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
phone antenna and body, etc. ence, and (2) this device must accept any
pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM interference, including interference that may
for the navigation system is inserted into the ● The signal strength display on the monitor cause undesired operation of the device.
player, it may be impossible to receive a call will not coincide with the signal strength
for a short period of time. display of some cellular phones. – This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area ● If reception between callers is unclear, ad- Causing Equipment Regulations.
surrounded by metal or far away from the justing the incoming or outgoing call volume
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” BLUETOOTH௡ is a
quality degradation and wireless connection later in this section. trademark owned by
disruption.
REGULATORY INFORMATION Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
● While a cellular phone is connected through U.S.A. and licensed to
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat- FCC Regulatory information
Xanavi Informatics
tery power of the cellular phone may dis- – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா Corporation.
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
cellular phones. modification, or attachments could damage

10/01/07—debbie ੭

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System (for U.S.)” later in this section.

LSU0001 LSU0002
PAIRING PROCEDURE 2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the
name list of the phones, and press the EN-
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument TER button.
panel or the switch on the steering
wheel, and select the “Pair phone” key on
the display using the NISSAN controller.
Then press the ENTER button.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LSU0003 LHA0978 LHA0983
3. When a PIN code appears on the screen, PHONEBOOK 4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to order to transfer a phonebook entry from
enter the PIN code. Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the your cellular phone to your phonebook in
phonebook. your car.
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone. See 1. Press the SETTING button, then select the 5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-
the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the “Phone” key and press the ENTER button. son’s name and phone number from the
details. You can also visit www.nissan- memory of the cellular phone. The memory
usa.com/bluetooth. You can also call 2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press the
ENTER button. sending procedure from the cellular phone
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for varies according to each cellular phone
instructions on pairing recommended cellu- 3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keys manufacturer. See the cellular phone own-
lar phones. from the name list of the phonebook and er’s manual for more details.
When the pairing is completed, the screen press the ENTER button.
will return to the Bluetoothா setup display.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:
Copy a phonebook from the Bluetoothா cellular
phone. The availability of this function depends
on each cellular phone. The copying procedure
from the cellular phone also varies according to
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-
er’s manual for more details.
Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:
Store the name and phone number from the
outgoing call list.
Copy from Incoming Call Logs:
incoming call list.
LHA0984 LSU0007
Transfer via Bluetooth:
6. After the download is registered in the 7. When the phonebook download is com- Transfer a contact from the Bluetoothா cellular
phonebook, the system will ask if you want to pleted, the screen will return to the name list phone. Availability of this function depends on
add a voice tag for it. The Voice Tag screen of the phonebook. each cellular phone. The transferring procedure
will be displayed. There are different methods to input a phone from the cellular phone also varies according to
number. Select one of the following options for each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-
If you want to add a voice tag select the er’s manual for more details.
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button. For Step 4 above.
example, if the person’s name is David, Enter Data by Keypad: Delete:
speak “David” while the Store voice tag Input the name and phone number manually us- Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-
screen is on the display. The David voice tag ing the keypad displayed on the screen. For in- book.
is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is a formation on how to use the touch screen, see
useful function for easy dialing supported by “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
the voice recognition system. For more infor- section.
mation, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System (for U.S.)” later in this section.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

4. After the call is over, perform one of the ● Dial (Keypad):
following to finish the call.
Input the phone number manually using the
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the call-in- keypad displayed on the screen. For infor-
progress screen and press the ENTER mation on how to use the touch screen, see
button. “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
section.
b. Press the switch on the steering
wheel.
c. When the call-in-progress screen is dis-
played press the PHONE button on the
instrument panel to hang up. If any other
screen is currently displayed, press the
PHONE button to display the call-in-
progress screen first, then press the
LSU0078
PHONE button again to hang up.
MAKING A CALL There are different methods to make a call. Select
To make a call, follow the procedures below. one of the following options instead of “Call
(Phonebook)” in Step 2 above.
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel or the switch on the steering ● Redial:
wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on Dial the previously dialed number again.
the display.
● Call (Call Logs):
2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the
Select the name or phone number from the
“PHONE” menu, and press the ENTER but-
incoming or outgoing call logs.
ton.
● Call (Downloaded):
3. Select the registered person’s name from
the list, and press the ENTER button. Dialing Select the name or phone number from the
will start and the screen will change to the downloaded call list.
call-in-progress screen.

10/11/07—debbie ੭

Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.
On Hold:
Put an incoming call on hold.
Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures
listed below.
a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
LHA0987 c. Press and hold the phone button on the LHA0988
steering wheel switches.
RECEIVING A CALL DURING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will There are some options available during a call.
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow Select one of the following displayed on the
the one of the procedures listed below. screen if necessary.
a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display. Hang up:
Finish the call.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel. Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
c. Press the phone button on the steering
wheel switches. Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Dial (Keypad):
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-
mail.

NOTE:
Push the TALK switch on the steering
wheel during a call allows numbers and
digits to be sent using Voice Recognition.
Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.
Mute will be cancelled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, press the volume control switch located LSU0009 LHA0978
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume ENDING A CALL PHONE SETTING
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in To finish the call, perform one of the following To set up the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-
the SETTING mode. procedures listed below: tem to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
● Select the “Hang up” key on the call-in-
the “Phone” key on the display, and then press
progress display and press the ENTER button.
the ENTER button.
● Push the switch on the steering wheel.
Phonebook:
● When the call-in-progress screen is dis- See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for add-
played press the PHONE button on the in- ing, editing and deleting a contact.
strument panel to hang up. If any other
screen is currently displayed, press the
PHONE button to display the call-in-
progress screen first, then press the
PHONE button again to hang up.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-
book:
Delete a single entry from the downloaded
phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter
key, then touch on the name key you wish to
delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the
entry.
Automatic Hold:
If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be
placed on hold automatically after several rings.
Use Vehicle Ringtone:
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is
different from the cellular phone’s will sound
LHA0979 when receiving a call. LHA0980
Downloaded Phonebook: Delete Call Logs: ● Bluetooth:
See the following information for each item. Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from If this item is turned off, the connection be-
the list. tween the cellular phone and the in-vehicle
● Download All: phone module will be canceled.
Download all of the contacts registered in Bluetooth Setup:
the Bluetooth cellular phone. Availability of See the following information for each item. ● Bluetooth Info:
this function depends on each cellular Check information about the device name,
phone. The memory downloading procedure vehicle name, device address device PIN
from the cellular phone also varies according and connection status.
to each cellular phone. See cellular phone ● Pair Phone:
Owner’s Manual for more details. See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.
● Delete Downloaded Phonebook:
Delete all of the downloaded phonebook
entries.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Paired Phone List:
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are
shown on the list. If you select a cellular
phone that is different from the one currently
being connected, the newly selected phone
will be connected to the system.
● Edit Phone Name:
If you would like to change the way your
phone’s name is displayed, select this key; a
character input screen will be displayed.

LHA0989 LSU0083
● Priority Change CALL VOLUME
If multiple phones are registered to the sys-
tem, you can change the priority of the Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
phones on the shown list. The system shows may improve clarity if reception between callers is
the priority level of each phone. Select unclear.
phone to change priority. Then, select an- ● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows
other phone to swap priority levels. you to hear a difference in volume
● Remove Paired Phone: ● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows
Delete a registered cellular phone from the the person you are talking with to hear a
paired list. difference in volume


10/01/07—debbie ੭

BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(for Canada – if so equipped)
To access the settings, press the SETTING but-
WARNING
ton, then highlight “Volume and Beeps” using the
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button. ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming phone while driving, exercise extreme
voice during a call by pushing the volume control caution at all times so full attention may
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the be given to vehicle operation.
volume control knob on the instrument panel.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

module when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System (for
Canada)” later in this section.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
● Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
WHA0977 phone module. Please visit
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா make or receive a hands-free telephone call with www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap- your cellular phone in the vehicle. mended phone list and pairing.
proved Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you ● You will not be able to use a hands-free
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
can set up the wireless connection between your phone under the following conditions:
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone vice area.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” tions.
in a tunnel, in an underground parking later in this section. You can also visit – Operation is subject to the following two con-
garage, near a tall building or in a moun- www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- ditions:
tainous area. shooting help.
1. This device may not cause interference and
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Some cellular phones or other devices may
from being dialed. cause interference or a buzzing noise to 2. this device must accept any interference,
come from the audio system speakers. Stor- including interference that may cause un-
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal desired operation of the device.
ing the device in a different location may
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
reduce or eliminate the noise. IC Regulatory information
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call. ● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual – Operation is subject to the following two con-
regarding the telephone charges, cellular ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
phone antenna and body, etc. ence, and (2) this device must accept any
pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM interference, including interference that may
for the navigation system is inserted into the ● The signal strength display on the monitor cause undesired operation of the device.
player, it may be impossible to receive a call will not coincide with the signal strength
for a short period of time. display of some cellular phones. – This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area ● If reception between callers is unclear, ad- Causing Equipment Regulations.
surrounded by metal or far away from the justing the incoming or outgoing call volume
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” BLUETOOTH௡ is a
quality degradation and wireless connection later in this section. trademark owned by
disruption.
REGULATORY INFORMATION Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
● While a cellular phone is connected through U.S.A. and licensed to
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat- FCC Regulatory information
Xanavi Informatics
tery power of the cellular phone may dis- – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா Corporation.
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
cellular phones. modification, or attachments could damage


10/01/07—debbie ੭

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System (for Canada)” later in this section.

LHA0884 LHA0978

PAIRING PROCEDURE 3. Select the “Pair Phone” key and press the
ENTER button, then select one of the “None
1. Press the SETTING button, then select the (Add New)” keys by pressing the ENTER
“Phone” key using the NISSAN controller button.
and press the ENTER button.
NOTE:
2. Scroll to the bottom of the list and select the
“Bluetooth Setup” key and press the ENTER If pairing a phone for the first time, press-
button. ing the PHONE button twice will bring you
to the pair phone list.
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to
enter the PIN code. The pairing procedure of
the cellular phone varies according to each
cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular
phone owner’s manual for the details.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0979 LHA0980 LHA0981
5. When the pairing is completed, the screen
will return to the Bluetoothா setup display.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0982 LHA0978 LHA0983
4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in 6. After the download is registered in the
PHONEBOOK order to transfer a phonebook entry from phonebook, the system will ask if you want to
Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the your cellular phone to your phonebook in add a voice tag for it. The Voice Tag screen
phonebook. your car. will be displayed.
If you want to add a voice tag select the
1. Press the SETTING button, then select the 5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button. For
“Phone” key and press the ENTER button. son’s name and phone number from the
example, if the person’s name is David,
memory of the cellular phone. The memory
2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press the speak “David” while the Store voice tag
sending procedure from the cellular phone
ENTER button. screen is on the display. The David voice tag
varies according to each cellular phone
is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is a
3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keys manufacturer. See the cellular phone own-
useful function for easy dialing supported by
from the name list of the phonebook and er’s manual for more details.
the voice recognition system. For more infor-
press the ENTER button. mation, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System (for Canada)” later in this section.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Transfer via Bluetooth:
Transfer a contact from the Bluetoothா cellular
phone. Availability of this function depends on
each cellular phone. The transferring procedure
from the cellular phone also varies according to
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-
Delete:
Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-
book.

LHA0984 LHA0985
7. When the phonebook download is com- Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:
pleted, the screen will return to the name list Copy a phonebook from the Bluetoothா cellular
of the phonebook. phone. The availability of this function depends
There are different methods to input a phone on each cellular phone. The copying procedure
number. Select one of the following options for from the cellular phone also varies according to
Step 4 above. each cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-
Enter Data by Keypad:
Input the name and phone number manually us- Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:
ing the keypad displayed on the screen. For in- Store the name and phone number from the
formation on how to use the touch screen, see outgoing call list.
“How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
Copy from Incoming Call Logs:
section.
incoming call list.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

c. Press the PHONE button on the instru-
ment panel.
There are different methods to make a call. Select
one of the following options instead of the “Call
(Phonebook)” key in step 2 above.
Redial:
Dial the previously dialed number again.
Call (Call Logs):
Select the name or phone number from the in-
coming or outgoing call logs.
Call (Downloaded):
Select the name or phone number from the
LHA0986 downloaded call list. LHA0987

MAKING A CALL Dial (Keypad): RECEIVING A CALL
Input the phone number manually using the key-
To make a call, follow the procedures below. pad displayed on the screen. For information on When you hear a phone ring, the display will
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument how to use the touch screen, see “How to use the change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
panel. touch screen” earlier in this section. the one of the procedures listed below.

2. Touch the “Call (Phonebook)” key. a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.

3. Touch one of the downloaded person’s key b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
from the list. Dialing will start. panel.
4. After the call is over, perform one of the c. Press the phone button on the steering
following to finish the call. wheel switches.
a. Touch the “Hang Up” key. There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
b. Press and hold the phone button
the screen.
on the steering wheel switches.

10/11/07—debbie ੭

Answer: Dial (Keypad):
Accept an incoming call to talk. Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-
On Hold:
mail.
Put an incoming call on hold.
Reject Call: NOTE:
Reject an incoming call. Push the TALK switch on the steering
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures wheel during a call allows numbers and
listed below. digits to be sent using Voice Recognition.
a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display. Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument Mute will be cancelled.
panel.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
c. Press and hold the phone button on the LHA0988 quieter, press the volume control switch located
steering wheel switches.
DURING A CALL on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
There are some options available during a call. on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
Select one of the following displayed on the the SETTING mode.
screen if necessary.
Hang up:
Finish the call.
Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-
book:
Delete a single entry from the downloaded
phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter
key, then touch on the name key you wish to
delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the
entry.
Automatic Hold:
If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be
placed on hold automatically after several rings.
Use Vehicle Ringtone:
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is
different from the cellular phone’s will sound
LHA0978 LHA0979 when receiving a call.
PHONE SETTING Downloaded Phonebook: Delete Call Logs:
See the following information for each item. Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from
To set up the hands-free phone system to your the list.
preferred settings, press the SETTING button, ● Download All:
then touch the “Phone” key on the display. Transfer phonebook entries from your cellu- Bluetooth Setup:
lar phone to the vehicle’s phonebook. For See the following information for each item.
Phonebook: more information, see “Phonebook” earlier in
See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for add- this section.
ing, editing and deleting a contact.
● Delete Downloaded Phonebook:
Delete all of the downloaded phonebook
entries.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0980 LHA0989 LSU0083
● Bluetooth: ● Remove Paired Phone: CALL VOLUME
If this item is turned off, the connection be- Delete a registered cellular phone from the
tween the cellular phone and the in-vehicle paired list. Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve clarity if reception between callers is
phone module will be canceled. ● Paired Phone List: unclear.
● Bluetooth Info: Up to 5 registered cellular phones are
shown on the list. ● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows
Check information about the device name, you to hear a difference in volume
vehicle name, device address device PIN ● Edit Phone Name:
and connection status. If you would like to change the way your ● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows
phone’s name is displayed, select this key; a the person you are talking with to hear a
● Pair Phone: difference in volume
See “Pairing Procedure” in this section. character input screen will be displayed.

● Priority Change
If multiple phones are registered to the sys-
tem, you can change the priority of the
phones on the shown list.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (for U.S. – if so equipped)

To access the settings, press the SETTING but- NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free “NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-
ton, then highlight “Volume and Beeps” using the operation of the systems equipped on this ve- mand Mode” later in this section.
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button. hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.
To improve the recognition success rate when
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming There are two voice recognition modes of opera- Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
voice during a call by pushing the volume control tion available. They are: Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” later
volume control knob on the instrument panel. ● Standard Mode
in this section. Otherwise, it is recommended that
● Alternate Command Mode Alternate Command Mode be turned off and
Standard Mode be used for the best recognition
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),
performance.
commands that are available are always shown
on the display and announced by the system. You For the voice commands for the navigation sys-
can complete your desired operation by simply tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
following the prompts given by the system. In this Manual of your vehicle.
mode, hands-free operation of Audio Climate
Control and Display is not available through NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
NISSAN Voice Recognition. STANDARD MODE
For advanced operation, you can change to an The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-
Alternate Command Mode that enables the option, phone and vehicle information. With this
eration of the display, audio, and climate control setting active, commands that are available are
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this always shown on the display and announced by
mode is active, an expanded list of commands the system.
can be spoken after pushing the TALK
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-
Displaying user guide
mand menu prompts are turned off. If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition for the first time or you do not know how to
success rate may be affected because the num- operate it, you can display the User Guide for
ber of available commands and the ways of confirmation.
speaking each command are increased. See

10/01/07—debbie ੭

You can confirm how to use voice commands by 4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several button.
voice commands.
5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-
ler and press the ENTER button.
Available items:
● Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
● Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
LSU0012 address.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument ● Placing Calls
panel.
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the command operation.
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button. ● Help on Speaking

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER command recognition by the system.
button. ● Voice Recognition Settings
NOTE: Describes the available Voice Recognition
settings.
You can skip the steps 1 to 3 above by
pressing the switch and saying
“Help”.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LSU0014 LSU0015 LSU0080
Getting started Useful tips for correct operation Voice recognition settings
Before using the Voice Recognition system for You can display useful speaking tips to help the The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-
the first time, you can confirm how to use com- system recognize your voice commands cor- ognition system are described.
mands by viewing the Getting Started section of rectly.
1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” and
the User Guide.
1. Highlight “Help on Speaking” and press the press the ENTER button.
1. Highlight “Getting Started” and press the ENTER button.
ENTER button. 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller.
screen using the NISSAN controller. screen using the NISSAN controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-
ognition system
If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or “Plac-
ing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to perform
these operations using Voice Recognition.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition initialization is completed.
BEFORE STARTING
To get the best recognition performance from
Voice Recognition, observe the following: WHA1109 LSU0017

● The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet GIVING VOICE COMMANDS 2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate and the system announces, “Would you like
1. Press the switch located on the to access Phone, Navigation, Information or
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-
steering wheel. Help?”
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the
system from correctly recognizing the voice 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
commands. screen changes from to , speak
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a a command.
command. 4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
● Speak in a natural conversational voice with- and speak after the tone sounds until your
out pausing between words. desired operation is completed.
● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Operating tips How to speak numbers Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
● Say a command after the tone. Voice com- Voice Recognition requires a certain way to mance.
mands cannot be accepted when the icon speak numbers when giving voice commands.
is . Refer to the following examples. NOTE:
● Commands that are available are always General rule: When speaking a house number, speak the
shown on the display and spoken through number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. “O” is included in the house number, it will
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted. ● When saying the phone number 800-662- not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
Please follow the prompts given by the sys- 6200, the system will accept “eight- “oh” instead of “zero”.
tem. hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
● If the command is not recognized, the sys-
supported.
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice. Examples:
● Press the switch on the steering ● 1-800-662-6200
wheel to return to the previous screen.
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
● If you want to cancel the command, press zero zero”
and hold the switch. The message,
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
zero zero”
● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the You can improve the recognition of phone num-
audio system volume knob while the system bers by saying the phone number in three groups
is making an announcement. of numbers. For example, when you try to call
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
the system will then ask you for the next three
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Standard Mode command list
Category Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Phone Displays Phone function commands.
Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.
Information Displays Vehicle Information.
Help Displays User Guide.

Navigation Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Phone Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).
Redial Makes a call to the last dialed number.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Vehicle Information Command: (if so equipped)
COMMAND ACTION
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.
Trip Computer Displays Trip information.
Maintenance Displays Maintenance information.

Voice command examples
Some basic voice command examples are de-
scribed here.
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

WHA1109 LSU0017 LSU0018
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone 2. The system announces, “Would you like to 4. Say “Dial Number”.
number 800-662-6200: access Phone, Navigation, Information or
Help?”
1. Press the switch located on the
steering wheel. 3. Say “Phone”.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LSU0019 LSU0020 LSU0021
5. Say “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the next 8. The system announces, “Please say the last
three digits or dial, or say change number.” four digits” or say change number.
7. Say “662”. 9. Say “6200”.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats, and
when special characters such as star (*),
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.
● If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
● Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
LSU0022 WHA1109
● If the system does not recognize your com-
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change mand, please try repeating the command Example 2 — Placing an international call
Number?” using a natural voice. Speaking too slow or to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
too loudly may further decrease recognition 1. Press the switch located on the
11. Say “Dial”. performance. steering wheel.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

NOTE:
● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is
recommended for improved recognition.
See “How to speak numbers” earlier in this
section.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LSU0017 LSU0018 LSU0023
2. The system announces, “Would you like to 4. Say “International Call”. 5. Say “011811112223333”.
access Phone, Navigation, Information or
Help?”
3. Say “Phone”.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The Alternate Command Mode enables control
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-
tems as well as additional commands for the
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-
tems. With this setting active, the system does
not announce or display the available commands
at each step.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an
expanded list of commands can be used after
pushing the TALK switch. Under this
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands
LSU0024 is not available on the display. Please review the LSU0025
6. Say “Dial”. expanded command list, available when this Activating Alternate Command Mode
mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111- 1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
mands are replaced. Please see examples of
222-3333. ment panel.
Alternate Command Mode screens.
NOTE: Please note that in this mode the recognition 2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display and
success rate may be affected as the number of then press the ENTER button.
Any digit input format is available in the
available commands and ways of speaking each 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
International Number input process, as
command are increased. You can turn this mode then press the ENTER button.
well as the special characters such as star
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show
more options.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LSU0026 LSU0027 LSU0059
4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” 6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and Press the switch, listen for the tone and
key and press the ENTER button. the setting menu is expanded to include the say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-
Alternate Command Mode options. See ing the command list main menu.
5. The confirmation message is displayed on
“Settings menu” later in this section for an
the screen. Select the “OK” key and press
explanation of the options. Only manual controls such as the touchscreen
the ENTER button to activate the Alternate
can navigate the command list menu.
Command Mode. Displaying the command list
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,
If you are controlling the system by voice com- you may access the command list using the fol-
mands for the first time or do not know the lowing steps:
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.
4. Highlight the “Command List” key using the
button.

LSU0028 LSU0059
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument 5. Highlight a category using the NISSAN con-
panel. troller and press the ENTER button. The
command list for the category selected is
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the shown.
button. 6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
NISSAN controller to view the entire list.
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER 7. Press the BACK button to return to the
button. previous screen.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Alternate Command Mode command
list
Navigation Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.
Minimize Freeway Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.
Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.
Recalculate Recalculates a route to the current destination.
Route Information Displays the Route Information Menu.
Cancel Route Cancels the current route.
Detour Displays a list of distances to detour from the current route.
Show Current Location Displays the current location on the Map view.
Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.
Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.
Planview Split Map Changes the Map display to show two 2-dimensional maps using a split screen.
Birdview Split Map Changes the Map display to show a 2-dimensional map and Birdview map using a split screen.
Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

COMMAND ACTION
North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.
Zoom In Changes the map scale to a small number.
Zoom Out Changes the map scale to a larger number.
Landmark Icons Shows or hides the points of interests on the displays.
Guidance Voice Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.
Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.
Store Location Stores the current location to the Address Book.

Phone Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Redial Makes a call to the last dialed number.
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.
Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.
Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Audio Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Radio Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Satellite Radio Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.
Music Box Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.
CD Starts to play a CD.

Vehicle Information Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Traffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.
Trip Computer Displays Trip information.
Maintenance Display Maintenance information.
Tire Pressure Displays the Tire Pressure screen.

Climate Control Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.
Climate Control Off Turns the climate control system off.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the
button.

LSU0031 LSU0084
Displaying user guide 5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-
ler and press the ENTER button.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- Available items:
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several ● Getting Started
voice commands.
Describes the basics of how to operate the
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument Voice Recognition system.
panel.
● Using the Address Book
2. Highlight the “Others” key using the
Tutorial for using the Address Book.
button. ● Finding a Street Address
3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Placing Calls Before starting
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice
command operation. Recognition, observe the following:
● Help on Speaking ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
speak commands in order for them to be sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
properly recognized by the system. from recognizing the voice commands cor-
● Voice Recognition Settings rectly.

Describes the available Voice Recognition ● When the climate control is in the AUTO
settings. mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
● Adapting the System to Your Voice
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a WHA1109
Tutorial for adapting the system to your command. Giving voice command
voice.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing 1. Press and release the switch located
USING THE SYSTEM between words. on the steering wheel.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes the display will show the mes-
sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”
or a beep sounds.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Operating tips How to speak numbers
● Say a command after the tone. Voice com- Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
mands cannot be accepted when the icon speak numbers when giving voice commands.
is . Refer to the following examples.
● If the command is not recognized, the sys- General rule:
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
command in a clear voice.
● When saying the phone number 800-662-
● Press the switch on the steering
6200, the system will accept “eight-
wheel to return to the previous screen.
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
● If you want to cancel the command, press “eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
and hold the switch. The message, supported.
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
LSU0033 Examples:
2. A list of commands appears on the screen, ● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
● 1-800-662-6200
and the system announces, “Please say a tem feedback, push the volume control
command from the displayed list or say Help switch on the steering wheel or use the – “One eight zero zero six six two six two
to show all commands.” audio system volume knob while the system zero zero”
is making an announcement.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the – “One eight hundred six six two six two
screen changes from to , speak ● To minimize the amount of prompts spoken zero zero”
a command. by the system in Alternate Command Mode,
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.
4. Once a command is recognized, the system
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback You can improve the recognition of phone num-
will announce the recognized command and function press the SETTING button, then bers by saying the phone number in three groups
perform the requested action. select the “Others” key using the NISSAN of numbers. For example, when you try to call
If the command is not recognized, the sys- controller and press the ENTER button. 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the Then select the “Voice Recognition” key us- the system will then ask you for the next three
command in a clear voice after the tone. ing the NISSAN controller and press the digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
ENTER button. the system will then ask for the last four digits.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of Speaker Adaptation:
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
Starts a system training procedure to learn the
mance.
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-
NOTE: aptation function” later in this section.

When speaking a house number, speak the Alternate Command Mode:
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter For advanced operation, an Alternate Command
“O” is included in the house number, it will Mode is provided. This setting enables control of
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-
“oh” instead of “zero”. tion to additional commands for the Phone and
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the
Settings menu system does not announce or display the avail-
The content of the Settings Menu differs when able commands at each step. When this mode is
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode. activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will
LSU0080
change to show more options.
Command List: SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION
Minimize Voice Feedback:
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-
Reduces the amount of the information spoken The voice recognition system has a function to
mand Mode.
for each voice instruction. learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
User Guide: performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
The user guide provides basic instructions for
using Voice Recognition and accessing some Having the system learn the user’s voice
voice commands.
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
NOTE: ment panel, highlight the “Others” key on the
display and then press the ENTER button.
The user guide can also be accessed from
within the INFO menu after pressing the 2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and
INFO button. then press the ENTER button.
3. Highlight the “Speaker Adaptation” key and
then press the ENTER button.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

6. Select a voice command to train and then
press the ENTER button.
The Voice Recognition system starts.

LSU0034 LSU0082
4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo- 5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-
rized by the system and press the ENTER tem from the following list and then press the
button. ENTER button.
● Navigation
● Audio
● Phone
● Vehicle Info.
● Others
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Continuous Learning:
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the
system learn the voice commands in succession,
without selecting commands one by one.

LSU0036 LSU0037
7. The system requests that you repeat a com- Speaker Adaptation function settings
mand after a tone. This command is also
displayed on the screen. Edit Name:
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on
screen changes from to , speak the screen.
the command that the system requested. Store Result:
9. When the system has recognized the voice When this item is turned to ON, the Voice Rec-
command, the voice of the user is learned. ognition system can easily recognize the user’s
Press the switch or the BACK button to voice that it has learned.
return to the previous screen. Reset Result:
If the system has learned the command correctly, Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-
the voice command indicator on the screen turns tion system has learned.
on.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
The system should respond correctly to all voice until the problem is resolved.
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Symptom/error message Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG- 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” earlier in this
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret section.
the command correctly. 2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System (for U.S.)” earlier
wrong voicetag in the phonebook. in this section.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

SYSTEM (for Canada – if so
equipped)
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the display, audio, climate
control, DVD, phone and navigation systems.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
the button located on the steering wheel.
Then speak the command for the system you
wish to activate. The command given is picked up
by the microphone, and it is performed when it is
properly recognized. At this time NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice and message (in
the center display) to inform you of the command
results.
COMMAND LIST LHA0892 LHA0908
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument 7. Press the BACK button to return to the
Displaying command list previous screen.
panel.
If you are controlling the system by voice com-
2. Touch the “Others” key, then touch the For information on how to use the touch screen,
mands for the first time or do not know the
“Voice Recognition” key. see “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
section.
ing procedure for displaying the voice command 3. Touch the “Command List” key.
list and help list.
4. Touch one of the category keys.
5. Touch one of the item keys in the category; a
command list will be shown.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen by touching
the “DOWN” key or the “UP” key to view the
entire list.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0899 LHA0990 LHA0991


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0992


10/01/07—debbie ੭

List of help commands
Navigation help:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual for details.
Audio help:
● Music Box

COMMAND ACTION
Music Box Play Turns on the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.
Play by Mood Plays the specified song matching your mood.
Relaxing Music Plays the specified relaxing music.
Lively Music Plays the specified lively music.
Slow Music Plays the specified slow music.
Upbeat Music Plays the specified upbeat music.
Play by Category Plays the specified song in the specified category.
My Favorites Plays your favorite song.
Hit Songs Plays the specified hit song.
Kids’ Songs Plays the specified song for children.
Rarely Played Plays a rarely played song.
Music Box OFF Turns off the Music Box.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Radio
– Radio

COMMAND ACTION
Radio Play Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Tune <87.7 - 107.9> Tunes to the specified FM frequency.
Tune <530 - 1710> Tunes to the specified AM frequency.
Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.
Radio OFF Turns the radio off.
Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

– Satellite (if so equipped)

COMMAND ACTION
Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.
Satellite Radio Channel <1 - 255> Tunes to the specified SAT frequency.
Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.
Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.
Radio OFF Turns the radio off.
Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.


10/02/07—cathy ੭

● DVD (if so equipped)

NOTE:
DVD commands are available while a DVD is being played.
COMMAND ACTION
DVD Play Turns the DVD player on, selecting the track last played.
DVD Stop Stops playing the DVD.
Track <1 to 99> Switches to the specified DVD track.
Chapter <1 to 999> Switches to the specified DVD chapter.
Title <1 to 99> Switches to the specified DVD title.
Title <1 to 99> Chapter <1 to 999> Switches to the specified DVD title on the specified chapter.
Group <1 to 9> Switches to the specified DVD group.
Group <1 to 9> Play Track <1 to 99> Switches to the specified DVD group on the specified track.
Menu Skip DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly.
Menu Skip OFF Turns off the menu skip.
DVD OFF Turns the DVD player off.
DVD Menu Switches to the specified DVD menu.


10/02/07—cathy ੭

● CD

COMMAND ACTION
CD Play Starts to play a CD.
Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.
Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified MP3 folder and plays the first file.
Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track on the specified MP3 folder.
CD OFF Stops the CD playback.
CD Text Displays the information about the track currently being played.
CD Menu Displays the CD menu.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Others
– Audio

COMMAND ACTION
Audio Play Turns the audio system on.
Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.

– CF

COMMAND ACTION
Compact Flash Play Starts to play the files saved in the CompactFlash™ card.
Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.
Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified folder in the CompactFlash™ card and plays the first file.
Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track in the specified folder in the CompactFlash™ card.
Compact Flash OFF Stops the playback of the CompactFlash™ card.
Compact Flash Text Displays the information about the file currently being played.
Compact Flash Menu Displays the CompactFlash™ menu.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Phone help:

COMMAND ACTION
Phone Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.
Phone Dial Dials the phone number given in the command.
Phone Dial <Phone number> Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number is automatically dialed.
Phonebook Shows the first page of the Phonebook list.
Phonebook< Voicetag> Dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag”.
Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).
Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).
Phone Select Selects another cellular phone registered in the system.
Play Phonebook Outputs the “Voicetags” registered in the system.

Climate control help:

COMMAND ACTION
Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.
Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.
Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C> Sets the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.
Driver Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C> Sets the driver’s side temperature to the value given in the command.
Passenger Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C> Sets the passenger’s side temperature to the value given in the command.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

Others help:
● Vehicle

COMMAND ACTION
Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.
Trip Computer Displays the Trip Computer screen.
Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.
Tire Pressure Displays the Tire Pressure screen.
Status Displays the Status screen.

● Help

COMMAND ACTION
Help Displays the command list option screen.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Voice Recognition Settings
Displays the description of voice recognition
settings.
● Adapting the System to Your Voice
Simulates an example of the operation to
adapt the system to your voice.
For the items “Using the Address Book” and
“Finding a Street Address”, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual for details.
For information on how to use the touch screen,
see “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
section.
LHA0993 LHA0994
Displaying the user guide Available items:
You can confirm how to use voice commands by ● Getting Started
displaying a simplified User Guide or by display- Displays the simplified User Guide describ-
ing simulated voice command operations. ing how to operate the voice recognition
system.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel. ● Placing Calls
2. Touch the “Others” key, then touch the Simulates voice commands to make a phone
“Voice Recognition” key. call by voice command operation.

3. Touch the “User Guide” key. ● Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-
tem is ready to accept voice commands. If
the button is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, the display will show the mes-
sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
LHA0995 LHA0996
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the Giving voice commands
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration 1. Press the button ᭺.
1
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly. 2. The system announces: “Please say a com-
● When the climate control is in the AUTO mand after a tone.”
mode, the fan speed decreases automati- 3. After the tone sounds and the face icon of
cally for easy recognition. the display changes, speak a command. For
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a additional information, see “List of help com-
command. Otherwise, the command will not mands” earlier in this section.
be received properly. 4. Voice and message feedback will be pro-
● Start speaking a command within 1.5 sec- vided when the command is accepted.
onds after the tone sounds.
● If the command is not recognized, the sys-
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing tem announces: “Please say again.” Repeat
between words. the command in a clear voice.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● If you want to cancel the command, press SYSTEM FEATURES – “Tune nine thirty”
and hold the button for 2 seconds
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol- ● 1000 kHz
during feedback. The system will announce:
“Voice cancelled.” lowing systems: – “Tune one thousand”
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice ● Navigation (if so equipped) ● 1040 kHz
feedback, push the volume control ● Audio (radio and CD)
switch or the on the steering – “Tune ten forty”
wheel while being provided with the feedback. ● DVD Mobile Entertainment System
● 1710 kHz
Operating tips ● Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
– “Tune seventeen ten”
● Voice commands cannot be accepted when ● Climate Control
● 97.9 MHz
the face icon in the display is gray. ● Vehicle Systems
– “Tune ninety seven point nine”
● If the command is not recognized, the sys- For additional information on the navigation sys-
tem announces, “Please say again”. Repeat tem, see the separate Navigation System Own- ● 100.5 MHz
the command in a clear voice. er’s Manual. – “Tune one hundred point five”
● Press the BACK button once to return to the
previous screen. How to say numbers ● 101.1 MHz
● If you want to cancel the command, press NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain – “Tune one oh one point one FM”
and hold the TALK button for 1 sec- way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
Temperatures (climate control):
ond. The message “Voice canceled” will be to the following examples.
announced. Speak temperatures according to the following
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
● Press the TALK button again to pause examples:
“0”.
the operation. Press the TALK button ● 74°F
to restart the operation. Radio frequencies:
– “Temperature seventy four”
● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys- Speak radio frequencies according to the follow-
tem feedback, push the volume control ing examples: ● 21.5°C
switch or on the steering wheel
● 930 kHz – “Temperature twenty one point five”
or use the audio system volume knob while
the system is making an announcement. – “Tune nine thirty AM” – “Temperature twenty one and a half”

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● 19.0°C Personal vocabulary (voicetags)
– “Temperature nineteen point zero” NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the function
– “Temperature nineteen point oh.” called “voicetags”, which can be associated with
the phone and the navigation system (if so
– “Temperature nineteen” equipped). Using your own voice, 40 voicetags
can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone)
Phone numbers: and 20 locations can be registered in the “Ad-
Speak phone numbers according to the following dress Book” (navigation system).
examples: For additional information, see “Bluetoothா
● 1-800-662-6200 Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem (for Canada)” earlier in this section and/or
● say “Dial” or “Phone dial” the system will the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual
respond with “Please say the first group of (if so equipped) for the method of “voicetag”
numbers”, then say: registration. LHA0884

– “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”, VOICE COMMAND LEARNING
– “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
FUNCTION
oh”, or The voice recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
– “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh performance. The system can memorize the
oh”. voices of up to three persons.
Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
dialing results, say phone numbers as single dig-
its.
Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0909 LHA0910 LHA0997
Having the system learn the user’s 4. Touch one of the User number keys to have
voice your voice memorized by the system as that
user.
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel, touch the “Others” key on the 5. Touch a category to be learned by the sys-
display. tem from the following list:

2. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key. ● Audio

3. Touch the “Voice Command Learning” key. ● Phone
● Vehicle Info.
● Others
The voice commands in the category are dis-
played.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0998 LHA1000 LHA0999

6. Touch a voice command. The voice recogni- 7. The system requests that you repeat a com- Learning function settings
tion system starts. mand after a tone. While inside the Voice Command Learning
8. After the tone sounds and the face icon on screen, touch the “Setting” key to enable the
the screen changes from to gray to orange, following items:
speak the command that the system re- ● Edit Name:
quested. Edit the user name using the keypad dis-
9. When the system has recognized the voice played on the screen.
command, the voice of the user is learned. ● Store Result:
Press the BACK button to return to the previous When this item is turned to ON, the voice
screen. If the system has learned the command recognition system can easily recognize the
correctly, the voice command indicator on the user’s voice that it has learned.
screen turns on.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA1001 LHA0884 LHA0909
● Reset Result: VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS Voice Command Learning:
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recog-
Press the SETTING button, then touch the “Oth- For information, see “Voice command learning
nition system has learned.
ers” key, then touch the “Voice Recognition” key; function” earlier in this section.
● Continuous Learning: the voice recognition settings screen will appear. User Guide:
When this item is turned to ON, you can
have the system learn the voice commands Command List: For information, see “Displaying the user guide”
in succession, without selecting commands For information, see “List of help commands” earlier in this section.
one by one. earlier in this section.
Minimize Voice Feedback:
When this item is enabled (indicator is illumi-
nated), vocal feedback during voice recognition
is reduced when the system is activated.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

LHA0910


10/01/07—debbie ੭

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Where the solutions are listed by number. Try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
The system should respond correctly to all voice until the problem is resolved.
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Symptom/error message Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG- 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. See Command list in this section.
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret the 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
command correctly.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
The system consistently selects the wrong 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directory
voicetag. or Phone Directory command.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
On-pavement and off-road driving Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Intelligent Key System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Hill start assist system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

10/01/07—debbie ੭

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ● The exhaust system and body should be
entering the vehicle, drive with all win- inspected by a qualified mechanic
● Do not leave children or adults who dows fully open, and have the vehicle whenever:
would normally require the assistance inspected immediately.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets a. The vehicle is raised for service.
should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage.
entering into the passenger
others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine compartment.
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, running for any extended length of time.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could c. You notice a change in the sound of
quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the lift gate and rear windows the exhaust system.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
d. You have had an accident involving
people or animals. gases could be drawn into the passen-
damage to the exhaust system, un-
ger compartment. If you must drive with
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
the lift gate or rear windows open, fol-
straps to help prevent it from sliding or low these precautions: ● If a special body, camper, or other
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than equipment is added for recreational or
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- 1. Open all the windows.
other usage, follow the manufacturer’s
lision, unsecured cargo could cause 2. Set the air recirculation but- recommendation to prevent carbon
personal injury. ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan monoxide entry into the vehicle. Do not
control dial to 4 (high) to circulate occupy these areas while the engine is
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) the air. running even if the vehicle is parked.
Some recreational vehicle appliances
WARNING ● If electrical wiring or other cable con-
such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters,
nections must pass to a trailer through
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they etc. may also generate carbon
the seal on the lift gate or the body,
contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or try into the vehicle.
death.

5-2 Starting and driving

10/01/07—debbie ੭

THREE-WAY CATALYST CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
The three-way catalyst is an emission control ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
SYSTEM (TPMS)
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust from leaded gasoline will seriously re- Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to should be checked monthly when cold and in-
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. help reduce exhaust pollutants. flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
WARNING or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- electrical systems can cause overrich tires of a different size than the size indicated on
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
or flammable materials away from the causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- you should determine the proper tire inflation
exhaust system components. ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- pressure for those tires.)
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over able loss of performance or other un-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
flammable materials such as dry grass, usual operating conditions are
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
waste paper or rags. They may ignite detected. Have the vehicle inspected
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
and cause a fire. promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
when one or more of your tires is significantly
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
level. Running out of fuel could cause sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
the engine to misfire, damaging the your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
three-way catalyst. the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
● Do not race the engine while warming it
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
up.
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
the engine.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Starting and driving 5-3

10/01/07—debbie ੭

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a ● The low tire pressure warning light does not For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the automatically turn off when the tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
function indicator is combined with the low tire recommended pressure, the vehicle must be (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
pressure telltale. When the system detects a driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire WARNING
mately one minute and then remain continuously pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure. ● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- ● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect and the outside temperature. Low outside to a safe location and stop the vehicle
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS temperature can lower the temperature of as soon as possible. Driving with under-
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, the air inside the tire which can cause a inflated tires may permanently damage
including the installation of replacement or alter- lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the tires and increase the likelihood of
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always nate. If the warning light illuminates in low could occur and may lead to an acci-
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- ambient temperature, check the tire pres- dent and could result in serious per-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to sure for all four tires. sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and ● You can also check the pressure of all tires all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function (except the spare tire) on the display screen. the recommended COLD tire pressure
properly. The order of the tire pressure figures dis- shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
played on the screen does not correspond tion label to turn the low tire pressure
Additional information: warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
with the actual order of the tire position. See
● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres- “Tire pressure information” in the “Display replace it with a spare tire as soon as
sure of the spare tire. screen, heater, air conditioner and audio possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
systems” section. of emergency” section for changing a
● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle flat tire.)
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Some examples are: ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
is replaced, tire pressure will not be – Facilities or electric devices using similar radio DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
indicated, the TPMS will not function frequencies are near the vehicle.
and the low tire pressure warning light Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
will flash for approximately 1 minute. – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
The light will remain on after 1 minute. being used in or near the vehicle. They have higher ground clearance than passen-
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a ger cars to make them capable of performing in a
possible for tire replacement and/or DC/AC converter is being used in or near the variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
system resetting. vehicle. This gives them a higher center of gravity than
● Replacing tires with those not originally ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground
FCC Notice: clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
proved by the party responsible for compli- designed for cornering at the same speeds as
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol ance could void the user’s authority to op- conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more
tire sealant into the tires, as this may erate the equipment. than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
sensors. This device complies with Part 15 of the all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
CAUTION Canada. this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
Operation is subject to the following two or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
Do not place metalized film or any metal
conditions: (1) This device may not cause person is significantly more likely to die than a
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
harmful interference, and (2) this device person wearing a seat belt.
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the must accept any interference received, in- Be sure to read the driving safety precautions
TPMS will not function properly. cluding interference that may cause undes- later in this section.
ired operation of the device.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.


10/01/07—debbie ੭

AVOIDING COLLISION AND DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ROLLOVER DRIVING Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-
WARNING WARNING ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe Never drive under the influence of alcohol leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-
and prudent manner may result in loss of or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- hicle.
control or an accident. duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after Remember that two-wheel drive models are less
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all drinking alcohol increases the likelihood capable than four-wheel drive models for rough
traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high of being involved in an accident injuring road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, yourself and others. Additionally, if you snow or mud, or the like.
because these driving practices could cause you to are injured in an accident, alcohol can Please observe the following precautions:
lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, increase the severity of the injury.
loss of control could result in a collision with
other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, WARNING
to roll over, particularly if the loss of control you must choose not to drive under the influence ● Drive carefully when off the road and
causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be at- of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are avoid dangerous areas. Every person
tentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al- who drives or rides in this vehicle
Never drive when under the influence of alcohol though the local laws vary on what is considered should be seated with their seat belt
or drugs (including prescription or over-the- to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol fastened. This will keep you and your
counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). affects all people differently and most people passengers in position when driving
Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the underestimate the effects of alcohol. over rough terrain.
“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And ● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-
restraint system” section of this manual, and also that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- stead drive either straight up or straight
instruct your passengers to do so. scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- tip over sideways much more easily
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted hol, drugs, or some other physical condition. than they can forward or backward.
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.

10/01/07—debbie ੭

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. ● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around ● Lower your speed when encountering
If you drive up them, you may stall. If when driving over rough terrain. Prop- strong crosswinds. With a higher center
you drive down them, you may not be erly secure all cargo so it will not be of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-
able to control your speed. If you drive thrown forward and cause injury to you fected by strong side winds. Slower
across them, you may roll over. or your passengers. speeds ensure better vehicle control.
● Do not shift gears while driving on ● To avoid raising the center of gravity ● Do not drive beyond the performance
downhill grades as this could cause excessively, do not exceed the rated capability of the tires, even with 4WD
loss of control of the vehicle. capacity of the roof rack/gear bin (if so engaged.
equipped) and evenly distribute the
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-
load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off tempt to raise two wheels off the
area as far forward and as low as pos-
or other hazard that could cause an ground and shift the transmission to
sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires
accident. any drive or reverse position with the
larger than specified in this manual.
engine running. Doing so may result in
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make This could cause your vehicle to roll
drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-
it to the top of a steep hill, never at- over.
hicle movement which could result in
tempt to turn around. Your vehicle
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the serious vehicle damage or personal
could tip or roll over. Always back
steering wheel when driving off-road. injury.
straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never
The steering wheel could move sud-
back down in N (Neutral) or with the
denly and injure your hands. Instead
clutch depressed (manual transmission
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
vehicles), using only the brake, as this
the outside of the rim.
could cause loss of control.
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
● Heavy braking going down a hill could
that the driver and all passengers have
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
their seat belts fastened.
resulting in loss of control and an acci-
dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low ● Always drive with the floor mats in
gear to control your speed. Use the hill place as the floor may become hot.
descent control feature (if so
equipped).


2008 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL

2008 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL

More Related Content

Similar to 2008 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL

More from Classic Cars Nissan

Recently uploaded

2008 PATHFINDER OWNER'S MANUAL